2004 Nissan Frontier Owners Manual

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!● NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropri-

ate child restraint systems. Pre-teen chil-dren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual forimportant safety information.

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the begin-ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate four-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure to read“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVINGThis vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-ing collision and rollover”, and “Drivingsafety precautions”, in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified. Modi-fication could affect its performance,safety or durability, and may even violategovernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems result-ing from modifications may not be cov-ered under NISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2004 Truck/Frontier (d22)Owners Manual (owners)—USA_English (nna)05/25/04—arosenma X

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

© 2004 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.GARDENA, CALIFORNIA

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar-dena, California.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication toproduce the finest in safe, reliable and economicaltransportation. Your vehicle is the product of a suc-cessful worldwide company that manufactures carsand trucks in over 17 countries and distributes themin 170 nations.

NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufacturedby Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded inTokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world-wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largestautomaker in the world. In addition to cars andtrucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marineengines, boats and other diversified products.

NISSAN has made a substantial and growing in-vestment in North America. NISSAN’s commitmentis over $6 billion dollars in capital investments infacilities across the continent. Some of the facilitiesinclude the Nissan Manufacturing facilities in Can-ton, Mississippi and in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle

styling design at Nissan Design America, Inc. in SanDiego, California, and engineering at Nissan Tech-nical Center North America in Farmington Hills,Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs more than21,000 people throughout the United States,Canada, and Mexico. An additional 60,000 peoplework for the 1,250 NISSAN and INFINITI dealersacross North America.

NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to theCanadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppli-ers and over 150 dealers employ approximately4,500 people. These include company employeesand the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada.In addition, many Canadians work for companiesthat supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with ma-terials and services ranging from the operation ofport facilities and transportation services, to thesupply of lubricants, parts and accessories.

NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and com-puters in automobiles, and has led the industry inimproving both performance and fuel efficiencythrough new engine designs and the use of syn-thetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The com-pany has also developed ways to build quality into itsvehicles at each stage of the production process,both through extensive use of automation and —most importantly — through an awareness thatpeople are the central element in quality control.

From the time the parts arrived from our suppliersuntil you took delivery of your new NISSAN, dozensof checks were made to ensure that only the best jobwas being done in producing and delivering yourvehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure thatwhen you take your NISSAN to your dealer formaintenance, the service technician will perform hiswork according to the quality standards that havebeen established by NISSAN.

Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As youknow, seat belts are an integral part of the safetysystems that will help protect you and your passen-gers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.We urge you to use the seat belts every time youdrive the vehicle.

The NISSAN story of growth and achievement re-flects our major goal: to provide you, our customer,with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsman-ship — a product that we can be proud to build andyou can be proud to own.

WFW0002

WELCOME TO THE WORLD OF NISSAN


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments or ques-tions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM


Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

Z REVIEW COPY—2004 Truck/Frontier (d22)Owners Manual (owners)—USA_English (nna)06/09/04—tbrooks X

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-20)2. Front seat belts (P. 1-20)3. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P.1-12)4. Seats (P. 1-2)5. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-14)6. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-39)7. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-41)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0037

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


1. Engine hood (P. 8-6)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-18)3. Windshield (P. 8-25)4. Roof rack (P.2-30)5. Power windows (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)6. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-2, 3-4, 3-2)7. Mirrors (P. 3-13)8. Tire pressure (P. 8-35)9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)10. Tire chains (P. 5-30)11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-20); Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30)12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0035

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


1. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)2. Truck box, tailgate (P.3-15)3. Roof rack (P.2-30)4. Rear sliding window (if so equipped)

(P.2-34)5. Child safety rear door lock (Crew Cab

models only) (P.3-4)6. Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-11, P. 9-3)7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0036

EXTERIOR REAR



1. Map lights (P. 2-34)2. Sun visors (P. 3-13)3. Inside mirror (P. 3-13)4. Ventilators (P. 4-2 )5. Glove box (P. 2-28)6. Shift knob (automatic transmission, if so

equipped) (P. 5-10)7. Cup holders (P. 2-27)8. Front seats (P. 1-2)9. Console box (P. 2-28)10. Rear seats (P. 1-5)11. Flat tire (P. 6-2 )See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0038

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Headlight/turn signal switch (P. 2-20)2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)3. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-18)4. Power outlet (P. 2-24)5. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-2)6. Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-16)7. Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch (if so

equipped) (P. 1-16)8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-7)9. Glove box (P. 2-28)10. Audio system (P. 4-10)11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-22)12. Automatic/manual selector lever (P. 5-10)13. Transfer case shift lever (if so equipped)

(P. 5-21)14. Parking brake release lever (P. 5-18)15. Cruise control main/set switch (if so

equipped) (P. 5-19)16. Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-7,

P. 2-23)17. Steering wheel switch for audio controls

(if so equipped) (P. 4-28)18. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-24)19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-21)20. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-23)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.WIC0638

INSTRUMENT PANEL



KA24DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(A/T model) (P. 8-14)3. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)7. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

(P.8-16)8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-17)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-9)10. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)11. Battery (P. 8-17)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WDI0087

ENGINE COMPARTMENT LOCATIONS



VG33E engine

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-28)2. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(A/T model) (P. 8-14)4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

(P.8-16)6. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-17)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-9)10. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)12. Battery (P. 8-17)

WDI0269



VG33ER engine

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-28)2. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(A/T model) (P. 8-14)4. Supercharger5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)6. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-17)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-9)10. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)12. Battery (P. 8-17)

WDI0270



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock brakewarning light

2-10

Automatictransmission oiltemperaturewarning light( model)

2-10

Automatictransmissionpark warninglight( model)

2-10

or

Brake warninglight

2-10

Warninglight

Name Page

Charge warninglight

2-11

Door openwarning light

2-11

Engine oil pres-sure warninglight

2-11

Low fuel warn-ing light

2-11

Low tire pres-sure warninglight (if soequipped)

2-11

Low windshieldwasher fluidwarning light(if so equipped)

2-12

Warninglight

Name Page

Passengersupplementalair bag OFFindicator light(except CrewCab models)

2-12

Seat belt warn-ing light andchime

2-13

Supplementalair bag warninglight

2-13

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS



Indicatorlight

Name Page

CRUISE mainswitch indicatorlight (if soequipped)

2-13

Cruise SETswitch indicatorlight (if soequipped)

2-13

4–wheel driveindicator light(if so equipped)

2-14

High beam indi-cator light(Blue)

2-14

Malfunctionindicator lamp(MIL)

2-14

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Overdrive offindicator light(automatictransmissiononly)

2-15

Slip indicatorlight (if soequipped)

2-15

Turnsignal/hazardindicator lights

2-15

Vehicle dy-namic controloff indicatorlight (if soequipped)

2-15




MEMO

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental air bags

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Tilting rear bench seat(Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Jump seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Passenger supplemental air bag on/offswitch and light (except Crew Cab models) . . . . . . 1-16Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Two-point type seat belt without retractor(jump seat in King Cab models and center ofrear seat in Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Installation on rear bench seat centerposition (Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Installation on rear bench seat outboardpositions (Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41Installation on front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat properly. See“Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” laterin this section.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

WARNING

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped.

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat tomake sure it is securely locked.

WRS0175 WRS0176

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-3


Tilting

The front passenger’s seat can be tilted to makeit easier for jump seat passengers to get in andout.

To tilt the seatback, pull the reclining lever up orpush the tilt lever down. The seat automaticallymoves forward.

To return the seat, move the whole seat back-ward, then push the seatback up until it locks.

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat tomake sure it is securely locked.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofthe seat cushion to the desired position.

King cab passenger seat onlyWRS0211 WRS0131



Lumbar support (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

TILTING REAR BENCH SEAT (CrewCab models only)

The rear bench seat can be tilted to remove thejacking tools from the storage area.

To tilt the seatback, pull the strap up s1 and tilts2 the seatback forward.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areas bypassengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

WRS0389 WRS0212



JUMP SEAT (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Do not use a child restraint in the jumpseats (King Cab model). These seatsare not suitable for child restraintinstallation.

● When folding the jump seat, be carefulnot to squeeze your finger between theseat cushion and the body side.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENTTo raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

ARS1026 WRS0213



Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe driver and passenger supplemental front airbags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:This system can help cushion the impact force tothe head and chest of the driver and front pas-senger in certain frontal collisions.

The supplemental air bags are designed tosupplement the crash protection provided bythe driver and front passenger seat belts and arenot a substitute for them. Seat belts shouldalways be correctly worn and the driver and frontpassenger seated a suitable distance away fromthe steering wheel and instrument panel. (See“Seat belts” later in this section for instructionsand precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WRS0134

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



WARNING

● The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. If you are unrestrained,leaning forward, sitting sideways or outof position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in a crash.You may also receive serious or fatalinjuries from the supplemental front airbag if you are up against it when itinflates. Always sit back against theseatback and as far away as practicalfrom the steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theair bag system monitors the severity ofa collision and then inflates the air bagsbased on belt usage. Failure to properlywear seat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

WRS0031



WARNING

Never let children ride unrestrained or ex-tend their hands or face out of the win-dow. Do not attempt to hold them in yourlap or arms. Some examples of dangerousriding positions are shown in theillustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags inflate if they are not properly re-strained. Pre-teens and children shouldbe properly restrained in the rear seat, ifavailable.

● Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat of a modelequipped with a supplemental air bagON/OFF switch unless you first turnOFF the air bag. An inflating supple-mental air bag could seriously injure orkill your child. See “Child restraints”later in this section for details.

ARS1045 WRS0256



1. Diagnosis sensor unit2. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractors3. Supplemental air bag modules4. Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch5. Passenger air bag OFF indicator

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental front air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The passengersupplemental front air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box.

These systems are designed to meet optionalcertification requirements under U.S. regulations.They are also permitted in Canada. The optionalcertification allows the front air bags to be de-signed to inflate somewhat less forcefully thanpreviously. However, all of the information,cautions and warnings in this manual stillapply and must be followed.

The supplemental front air bag system is de-signed to inflate in higher severity frontal colli-sions, although it may inflate if the forces in an-other type of collision are similar to those of ahigher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate incertain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lackof it) is not always an indication of proper supple-mental front air bag system operation.

King Cab models are equipped with a supple-mental front passenger air bag ON/OFF switch.Because no rear seat exists where a rear facingchild restraint can be secured as in other models,the switch is designed to turn OFF the passengersupplemental air bag so that a rear facing childrestraint can be used in the front passenger seat.See “Passenger supplemental air bag ON/OFFswitch and light” later in this section for details.

Crew Cab models are not equipped with asupplemental front passenger air bag ON/OFFswitch because they have a rear seat for childrestraint installation. Further, for Crew Cab mod-

WRS0214



els, the supplemental air bag system has dualstage inflators for both the driver and passengerair bags. The system monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unitand seat belt buckle sensors that detect if theseat belts are fastened. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision and whetherthe seat belts are being used. Only one front airbag may inflate in a crash, depending on thecrash severity and whether the front occupantsare belted or unbelted. This does not indicateimproper performance of the system. If you haveany questions about the performance of your airbag system, please contact your NISSAN dealer.

When the supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by therelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-ing. Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. The supplemental front air bags in-flate quickly in order to help protect the frontoccupants. Because of this, the force of the frontair bag inflating can increase the risk of injury ifthe occupant is too close to, or is against, thefront air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-tal front air bag inflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.



● Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done bya NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by aNISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect inflation of the supplemental airbag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (forfront seats)

WARNING

● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.Tampering with the pre-tensioner seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the supplemental airbag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehiclebecomes involved in certain types of collisions,helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’sretractor. These seat belts are used the same asconventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may



cause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will flash intermittently after the igni-tion key is turned to the ON or START position. Inthis case, the pre-tensioner seat belt will notfunction properly. They must be checked andrepaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestNISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and guide the buyer to the appropriatesections in this Owner’s Manual.

WRS0111



PASSENGER SUPPLEMENTAL AIRBAG ON/OFF SWITCH AND LIGHT(except Crew Cab models)

WARNING

Air bags and seat belts are designed towork as a unit. Do not switch the air bagOFF unless you meet federal governmentcriteria. Switching off the air bag may in-crease the risk of serious or fatal injuriesin a collision where the air bag would haveinflated.

In rare instances, some passengers are exposedto serious injury risks from inflating air bags, es-pecially if not properly restrained. The U.S. andCanadian federal governments recognize otherlimited circumstances in which an air bag couldreduce safety. The passenger air bag ON/OFFswitch is, therefore, allowed in models without fullrear seats. Because the overall benefits of airbags are great, in most situations air bags shouldnot be switched off unless special governmentcriteria exist.

The passenger air bag ON/OFF switch is locatedunder the climate controls. It can be used to turnthe passenger supplemental air bag OFF.

The ON/OFF switch should ONLY be used toturn the passenger supplemental air bag OFFwhen the following government criteria exists:

● Infants (less than 1 year old) in rear facingchild restraints MUST be placed in the frontpassenger seat.

● Children ages 1-12 years MUST be placedin the front passenger seat.

● The passenger has a medical conditionwhich, according to a physician, causes theair bag to pose a special risk and makes thepotential harm from the air bag greater thanthe potential harm from turning off the airbag.

Seat belts and child restraints should always beproperly used. See “Precautions on seat beltusage” and “Child restraints” later in this sectionfor details.

To turn the passenger supplemental air bag OFF,insert the ignition key in the passenger supple-mental air bag ON/OFF switch and turn theswitch clockwise to the OFF position. Then re-move the key. When the ignition is turned to theON or START position the passenger air bagOFF indicator light will illuminate to indicate theair bag is OFF. To turn the passenger supplemen-tal air bag ON, insert the ignition key in thepassenger supplemental air bag ON/OFF switch

and turn the switch counter clockwise to the ONposition. Then remove the key. When the ignitionis turned to the ON or START position the pas-senger air bag OFF indicator light will illuminatefor 7 seconds to indicate the system is workingproperly and then go out to indicate that thepassenger supplemental air bag is ON.

1. Do not operate the passenger supplementalair bag ON/OFF switch when the ignition isON.

2. Fully turn the passenger supplemental airbag ON/OFF switch to either the ON or OFFposition.

3. Always remove the ignition key after usingthe passenger supplemental air bagON/OFF switch.

4. The passenger air bag OFF indicator lightshould illuminate for 7 seconds after theignition is turned to the ON or START posi-tion. If not, the vehicle should be taken to aNISSAN dealer.

Items 2 and 3 above are intended to preventimproper use of the ignition key.

When the switch is turned to the ON position, thepassenger supplemental air bag is enabled andcould inflate in a frontal collision. When theswitch is turned to the OFF position, the passen-ger supplemental air bag is disabled and will not



inflate in a frontal collision. The passengersupplemental air bag OFF indicator light on theinstrument panel illuminates when the passengersupplemental air bag ON/OFF switch is turned tothe OFF position. The driver’s side supplementalair bag always remains enabled and is not af-fected by the passenger supplemental air bagON/OFF switch.

The passenger supplemental air bag light, dis-playing OFF in the center of the instrument panel,monitors the position of the passenger supple-mental air bag ON/OFF switch. When the igni-tion key is in the ON or START position, the lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turns offif the air bag ON/OFF switch is in the ON posi-tion, or stays on if the passenger supplemental airbag ON/OFF switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

● Do not switch the air bag OFF unlessyou meet the federal government crite-ria outlined previously. This vehicle (ex-cept Crew Cab models) is equippedwith seat belts with a “load limiter” fea-ture. The seat belts are designed towork with the air bags to reduce the riskof injury in a collision. The seat belts aredesigned to release additional beltwebbing during some collisions to re-duce the concentration of force on theoccupant’s chest area. In a collisionwith the airbag turned OFF, the seatbelt may allow the occupant enoughforward movement to incur serious orfatal injuries.

● Keep the passenger supplemental airbag ON/OFF switch turned ON unless arear-facing child restraint must be usedin the front seat, if children ages 1-12must be placed in the front seat, or if thepassenger has a medical condition,which, according to a physician, causesthe air bag to pose a special risk ofharm (the federal government criteria).If the switch is OFF, the air bag will notinflate in a collision as designed andthe extra protection provided by the airbag may be lost.

● Be sure to turn the passenger supple-mental air bag ON/OFF switch OFFwhen using a rear facing child restraintin the front passenger seat. If it is notOFF, the air bag may inflate in a colli-sion. The force of the rapidly inflatingair bag could cause serious injury or killthe child in the child restraint. Childrenages 1-12 and persons with specialmedical conditions may also be at riskfrom an inflating air bag.



● If the supplemental air bag warninglight located in the instrument panelnext to the speedometer comes onwhen the passenger supplemental airbag OFF light is also illuminated, some-thing may be wrong with the air bagsystem. Infants, children ages 1-12 orpersons with special medical condi-tions should not use the front passen-ger seat until the system is checked byyour NISSAN dealer.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front airbag system are placed in the vehicle as shown inthe illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental air bag andpre-tensioner seat belt systems. The circuitsmonitored by the supplemental air bag warninglight are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zonesensor, supplemental air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

WRS0215 LRS0100



If any of the following system conditions occur,the supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seatbelt systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the Supplemental Re-straint System (supplemental front air bag orpre-tensioner seat belt systems) may not operateproperly. It must be checked and repaired. Takeyour vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems will not operate in an accident. Tohelp avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedureThe supplemental front air bag and pre-tensionerseat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged,

the supplemental air bag warning light remainsilluminated after inflation has occurred. Repairand replacement of these supplemental air bagsystems should be done only by a NISSANdealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the supplemental front air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition key should always be in theLOCK position when working under the hood orinside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a supplemental front air bag hasinflated, the air bag module will notfunction and must be replaced. Addi-tionally, if any of the supplemental frontair bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat belts must also be re-placed. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system should bereplaced by a NISSAN dealer. The airbag module and pre-tensioner seat beltsystem cannot be repaired.

● The supplemental front air bag systemand pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be inspected by a NISSANdealer if there is any damage to thefront end portion of the vehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalair bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem disposal procedures are set forth inthe appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.



PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed, and you are sitting upright and well backin your seat, your chances of being injured orkilled in an accident and/or the severity of injurymay be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly en-courages you and all of your passengers tobuckle up every time you drive, even if your seat-ing position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat (Crew Cabmodels) and, if appropriate, in a childrestraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or in a slide-in camper or othertype cargo area cover while the vehicleis in motion. These areas do not containseat belts. It is not designed for passen-gers. They could be injured in suddenbraking or a collision.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds, (9 kg) should be placed in rear

SSS0014



facing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints.

WARNING

● Be sure to turn the passenger supple-mental air bag ON/OFF switch OFFwhen using a rear facing child restraintin the front passenger seat in models soequipped. If it is not OFF, the air bagmay inflate in a collision. The force ofthe rapidly inflating air bag could causeserious injury or kill the child in thechild restraint. See “Passenger supple-mental air bag ON/OFF switch andlight” earlier in this section.

● In Crew Cab models, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat. An inflating supplementalair bag could seriously injure or kill yourchild. A rear facing child restraint mustonly be used in the rear seat.

● Do not install a child restraint in thejump seats (King Cab model). Theseseats are not suitable for child restraintinstallation.

● Infants and children need special pro-tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may notfit them properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperlyfitting seat belt could cause serious orfatal injury. Always use appropriatechild restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

In addition, there are many types of child re-straints available for larger children which shouldbe used for maximum protection.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat ifavailable (Crew Cab models). According toaccident statistics, children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat. This is especially importantbecause your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (Air bag system) for thefront passenger. See “Supplemental re-straint system” earlier in this section. Also,see “Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch andlight” earlier in this section.

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil-dren be placed in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Ca-nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Youshould choose a child restraint that fits your ve-hicle and always follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided.

If the child’s seating position has a shoulder beltthat fits close to the face or neck, the use of abooster seat (commercially available) may helpovercome this. The booster seat should raise thechild so that the shoulder belt is properly posi-tioned across the top, middle portion of theshoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. Thebooster seat should fit the vehicle seat and havea label certifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child hasgrown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or nearthe face and neck, use the shoulder belt withoutthe booster seat.



WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

s1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in thissection.

Manual front seat shownWRS0174



s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during asudden stop or on impact. A slow pullingmotion permits the seat belt to move, andallows you some freedom of movement inthe seat.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat belt and the rear three-point seat belts (Crew Cab only) have a cinchingmechanism for child restraint installation. It isreferred to as the automatic locking mode.

When automatic locking mode is activated theseat belt cannot be extended again until the seatbelt tongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the

emergency locking mode. See “Child restraints”later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138



Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (Forfront seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out the adjustment button s1 andmove the shoulder belt anchor to the desiredposition s2 , so the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-der belt anchor into position.

WRS0139 WRS0226



WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITHOUT RETRACTOR (jump seat inKing Cab models and center of rearseat in Crew Cab models)

WARNING


● Serious or fatal injury could occur.

Fastening the belts1. Insert the tongue into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

WRS0216 WRS0191



2. Tighten the belt by pulling the free end of thebelt away from the tongue.

3. Position the lap belt low and snug on thehips as illustrated.

4. Loosen the belt by holding the tongue at aright angle to the belt, then pull on the belt.

WRS0192 WRS0193 WRS0194



Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button thebuckle.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

WRS0201



PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

WARNING

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● In Crew Cab models, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat. An inflating supplementalair bag could seriously injure or kill yourchild. A rear facing child restraint mustonly be used in the rear seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat of a modelequipped with a supplemental air bagON/OFF switch unless you first turnOFF the air bag. An inflating air bagcould seriously injure or kill your child.See “Passenger supplemental air bagON/OFF switch and light” earlier in thissection.

● An improperly installed child restraintcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

In general, child restraints are designed to beinstalled with a lap belt or the lap portion of athree-point type seat belt. In addition, this vehicleis equipped with a universal child restraint loweranchor system, referred to as the LATCH (LowerAnchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected tothese lower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

Child restraints for infants and small children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manufactur-ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep thefollowing points in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Always follow all recommendedprocedures.

All U.S. states and provinces of Canadarequire that infants and small children berestrained in an approved child restraint atall times while the vehicle is being oper-ated.

WARNING


● Improper use of a child restraint canincrease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the belt holds therestraint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain.

● For a front-facing child restraint, if theseat position where it is installed has athree-point type lap/shoulder belt,check to make sure the shoulder beltdoes not go in front of the child’s face orneck. If it does, put the shoulder beltbehind the child restraint. If you mustinstall a front facing child restraint inthe front seat, see “Installation on frontpassenger seat” later in this section.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.



CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

INSTALLATION ON REAR BENCHSEAT CENTER POSITION (CrewCab models only)

Front facingWhen you install a child restraint in the rearcenter seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat asillustrated. Always follow the restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

Front Facing – step 1WRS0263

Front Facing — step 2WRS0250



3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a verytight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap beltadjustment.

4. Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to tilt the child restraint from sideto side, and tug it forward to make sure it issecurely in place. It should not move morethan 1 inch (25mm).

5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again,or put the restraint in another seat.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use.

Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint in the rearcenter seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat asillustrated. Always follow the restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.



Rear Facing – step 1WRS0266





3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a verytight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap beltadjustment.

4. Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to tilt the child restraint from sideto side, and tug it forward to make sure it issecurely in place. It should not move morethan 1 inch (25mm).

5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again,or put the restraint in another seat.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use.

Rear Facing — step 2WRS0267





INSTALLATION ON REAR BENCHSEAT OUTBOARD POSITIONS(Crew Cab models only)

WARNING

● The three-point belt in your vehicle isequipped with a locking mode retractorwhich must be used when installing achild restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

Front facingWhen you install a child restraint in a rear out-board seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.







3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts back to emergencylocking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

If necessary to ensure the child restraint issecure, pull the shoulder belt through theseat belt tongue beyond the stitching in thebelt.

After the seat belt is fully retracted and the childrestraint is removed from the seat, the stitchingon the shoulder belt can be pulled back throughthe seat belt tongue. The stitching locates theseat belt tongue near the top of the seat back foreasy access for rear seat passengers.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to tilt the child restraint from sideto side, and tug it forward to make sure it issecurely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch (25mm).

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more belt outof the retractor. If you cannot pull any morebelt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac-tor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.






After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint in a rear out-board seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel it engage.






3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts back to emergencylocking mode when the seat belt is fullyretracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.


After the seat belt is fully retracted and the childrestraint is removed from the seat, the stitchingon the shoulder belt can be pulled back throughthe seat belt tongue. This stitching locates theseat belt tongue near the top of the seat back foreasy access for rear seat passengers.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to tilt the child restraint from sideto side, and tug it forward to make sure it issecurely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch (25mm).

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more belt outof the retractor. If you cannot pull any morebelt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac-tor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.







LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

Passenger seat — King Cab (LATCH systemanchor point location)

LRS0233

LATCH system anchor point location frontpassenger seat (King Cab)

WRS0437



WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position (Crew Cabmodels) using the LATCH system an-chors. The child restraint will not besecured properly.

● Follow all other instructions concern-ing proper installation of child re-straints and the use of air bag ON/OFFswitches (if so equipped) outlined inthis manual.

● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to two anchors located at certain seatingpositions in your vehicle. This system is known asthe LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren) system. This system may also be referred toas the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicleis equipped with special anchor points that areused with LATCH system compatible child re-straints. Check your child restraint for a labelstating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys-tem. This information may also be in the childrestraint owner’s manual. If you have such a childrestraint, refer to the illustration for the seatingpositions equipped with LATCH system anchorswhich can be used to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seat back to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

Rear seat — Crew Cab (LATCH system an-chor point location)

LRS0234

LATCH system anchor point locations rearbench seat (Crew Cab)

WRS0439



When you install a LATCH system compatiblechild restraint to the lower anchor attachments,follow these steps:

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH system an-chors, such as seat belt webbing or seatcushion material. The child restraint willnot be secured properly if the LATCH sys-tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, insert the child restraintLATCH system anchor attachments into theanchor points on the seat. If the child re-straint is equipped with a top tether, see“Top tether strap child restraint” later in thissection for installation instructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint and beforeplacing the child in it, use force to push thechild restraint from side to side and tug itforward to make sure that the child restraintis securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch.

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINTIf your child restraint has a top tether strap, it mustbe secured to the provided anchor point. Securethe child restraint with a seat belt. Secure the toptether strap to the anchor bracket which providesthe straightest installation of the tether strap.Tighten the strap according to the manufactur-er’s instructions to remove any slack.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses. 1. Hook

2. Anchor bracket3. Top tether strap

Front passenger seat (King cab only)

First, secure the child restraint with the seat beltor the LATCH system (front passenger seat po-sition only), as applicable.

Adjust the front passenger seat head restraint toits highest position and route the top tether strapbetween the head restraint and the top of theseatback. Secure the top tether strap to the

Front passenger seat (King cab only)WRS0270



anchor point which provides the straightest in-stallation of the tether strap as shown later in thissection.

Tighten the tether strap according to the manu-facturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraintinstallation instructions in this section and thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Top tether strap2. Hook3. Anchor bracketRear bench seat (Crew cab only)First, secure the child restraint with the seat beltor the LATCH system (rear bench seat outboardpositions only), as applicable.

Position the top tether strap over the head re-straint and secure it to the tether anchor bracketthat provides the straightest installation.

Tighten the strap according to the manufactur-er’s instructions to remove any slack.

Anchor point locationsAnchor points are located under the rear window.King Cab vehicles will only have the outer anchorpoint. Crew Cab vehicles will have all 3 anchorpoints.

If you have any questions when installing atop strap child restraint on the rear seat,consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

Rear bench seat (Crew cab only)WRS0441

King CabWRS0223



Flaps are provided in the carpet for easy accessand are marked with the label shown (King Cabonly).

INSTALLATION ON FRONTPASSENGER SEAT

Front facing (Three-point type withretractor)

WARNING

● If so equipped, keep the passengersupplemental air bag ON/OFF switchturned ON unless a rear-facing childrestraint is used in the front seat. If theswitch is OFF, the air bag will not inflatein a collision as designed.

Crew CabWRS0224 WRS0210 WRS0378



● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat(Crew Cab models). However, if youmust install a forward-facing child re-straint in the front passenger seat,move the passenger seat to the rear-most position.

● Never install a rear facing child restraintin the front seating position of CrewCab models. Install a rear-facing childrestraint in the rear seat only. The forceof the inflating air bag could cause se-rious injury or kill the child in the childrestraint.

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

● If the supplemental air bag warninglight located in the instrument panelnext to the speedometer comes onwhen the passenger supplemental airbag OFF indicator light is also illumi-nated, something may be wrong withthe supplemental air bag system. Donot use a child restraint in the frontpassenger seat until the system ischecked by your NISSAN dealer.

If you choose to install a child restraint in the frontseat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the front pas-senger seat. Move the seat to the rear-most position. Adjust the head restraint toits highest position. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer’s instructions.






3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-gency locking mode when the seat belt isfully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.


After the seat belt is fully retracted and the childrestraint is removed from the seat, the stitchingon the shoulder belt can be pulled back throughthe seat belt tongue. The stitching locates theseat belt tongue near the top of the seat back foreasy access for passengers.






5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to tilt the child restraint from sideto side, and tug it for ward to make sure thatit is securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theseat belt is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.


Rear-facing (Three-point type withretractor, except Crew Cab models)

WARNING

● Never install a rear facing child restraintin the front seating position of CrewCab models. Install a rear-facing childrestraint in the rear seat only. The forceof the inflating air bag could cause se-rious injury or kill the child in the childrestraint.

● If so equipped, keep the passengersupplemental air bag ON/OFF switchturned ON unless a rear-facing childrestraint is used in the front seat. If theswitch is OFF, the air bag will not inflatein a collision as designed.

● Be sure to turn the passenger supple-mental air bag ON/OFF switch OFFwhen using a rear facing child restraintin the front passenger seat. If it is notOFF, the air bag may inflate in a colli-sion. The force of the rapidly inflatingair bag could cause serious injury or killthe child in the child restraint. See“Passenger supplemental air bagON/OFF switch and light” earlier in thissection.

● If the supplemental air bag warninglight located in the instrument panelnext to the speedometer comes onwhen the passenger supplemental airbag OFF indicator light is also illumi-nated, something may be wrong withthe supplemental air bag system. Donot use a child restraint in the frontpassenger seat until the system ischecked by your NISSAN dealer.

● The passenger three-point seat belt isequipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.




● Failure to use the automatic lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

If you choose to install a child restraint in the frontseat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the front pas-senger seat. Move the seat to the rear-most position. Always follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert the belt tongue into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latch en-gage.


Rear Facing — step 1

WRS0271

Rear Facing — step 2

WRS0310



3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-gency locking mode when the seat belt isfully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt toremove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to tilt the child restraint from sideto side, and tug it forward to make sure thatit is securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch.

6. Ensure the retractor is in the automatic lock-ing mode by trying to pull more seat belt outof the retractor. If you cannot pull any morebelt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac-tor is in the automatic locking mode.






7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the lapbelt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.




MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Compass and outside temperature display(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-9Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Rear window defroster switch(Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-21

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Dual 12 volt power outlets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Storage trays (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Grocery hooks (King Cab only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Tubular roof rack (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35


1. Headlight/turn signal switch (P. 2-20)2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)3. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-18)4. Power outlet (P. 2-24)5. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-2)6. Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-16)7. Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch

(if so equipped) (P. 1-16)8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-7)9. Glove box (P. 2-28)10. Audio system (P. 4-10)11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-22)12. Automatic/manual selector lever (P. 5-10)13. Transfer case shift lever (if so equipped)

(P. 5-21)14. Parking brake release lever (P. 5-18)15. Cruise control main/set switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-19)16. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-7, P. 2-23)17. Steering wheel switch for audio controls

(if so equipped) (P. 4-28)18. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-24)19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-21)20. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-23)WIC0638

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


1. Tachometer2. Warning/indicator lights3. Speedometer4. Engine coolant temperature gauge5. Fuel gauge6. Odometer/twin trip odometer

7. Change button

1. Speedometer2. Odometer3. Reset buttonSPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed inmiles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour(km/h).

Odometer/Twin tripThe odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

LIC0631

WIC0632

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


The trip odometer records the distance of indi-vidual trips. Before each trip reset the trip odom-eter.

Push the reset button to change the display asfollows:

ODO (odometer) → TRIP A → TRIP B → ODO

Push and hold the reset button for more than 1second to reset either trip odometer.

AIC1120



TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (r/min). The red zone s1 isshown in the illustration.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range when the gauge needle points be-tween the C and the H on the gauge.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, stop thevehicle as soon as safely possible. If theengine is overheated, continued opera-tion of the vehicle may seriously damagethe engine. See “If your vehicle over-heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec-tion for immediate action required.

WIC0358 LIC0091



FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel filler lid is lo-cated on the passenger side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the lamp should turn off. If the

lamp remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator lamp (MIL)” later inthis section.

This unit has the following functions:

● Measures terrestrial magnetism and indi-cates heading direction of vehicle

● Indicates outside air temperature

LIC0092

COMPASS AND OUTSIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if soequipped)



OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Push the MODE button s1 when the ignition keyis in the ON position. The outside temperaturewill be displayed s2 in °F.

● Push the MODE button to change from °F to°C.

● When the outside temperature is be-tween 130°F (55°C) and 158°F (70°C),the display shows 130°F (55°C) .

● When the outside temperature is lowerthan -40°F (-40°C) or higher than 158°F(70°C), the display shows only — — —

though it is operating. This is not amalfunction.

● The outside temperature sensor is lo-cated in front of the radiator. The sen-sor may be affected by road or engineheat, wind direction and other drivingconditions. The display may differ fromthe actual outside temperature or thetemperature displayed on varioussigns or billboards.

● Temperature display will not updateunless the vehicle is moving fasterthan 12 mph (20 km/h), or the ignitionswitch has been OFF for 2 hours.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the MODE button s1 when the ignition keyis in the ON position. The direction will be dis-played s2 .

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration. Record your zonenumber.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. Push the MODE button in for 5 seconds untilthe current zone entry number and the“VAR” icon is displayed.

4. Press the MODE button repeatedly until thedesired zone entry number is displayed.

Once the desired zone number is displayed, stoppressing the MODE button and the display willshow compass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

WIC0324



● If a magnet is located near the com-pass or the vehicle is driven where theterrestrial magnetism is disturbed, thecompass display may not indicate thecorrect direction.

● In places where the terrestrial magne-tism is disturbed, the correction of thedirection starts automatically.

Correction functions of the compassdisplayThe compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the direction is not showncorrectly, carry out the manual correction proce-dure set out below.

Manual correction procedure1. Push the MODE button for about 10 sec-

onds. The “CAL” icon will illuminate.

2. Drive the vehicle slowly in an open and safearea. The initial correction is complete whileturning in 1 or 2 turns.

In places where the earth’s magnetism is dis-turbed, the initial correction procedure may startautomatically.

WIC0355



or Anti-lock brake warning light Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped) 4-wheel drive indicator light (if so equipped)

Automatic transmission oil temperaturewarning light ( model)

Low windshield washer fluid warning light(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission park warning light( model)

Passenger supplemental air bag OFF indicatorlight (except Crew Cab models)

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive off indicator light(automatic transmission only)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Door open warning light CRUISE main switch indicator light(if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise SET switch indicator light(if so equipped)

Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light(if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light

CHECKING BULBSWith all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , ,

If the driver’s seat belt is fastened before theignition key is turned to the ON position,the light will not come on.

The following lights come on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



WARNING LIGHTSor Anti-lock brake

warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function ceases, but the regular brakingsystem continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

Automatic transmission oiltemperature warning light( model)

This light comes on when the automatic transmis-sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comeson while driving, reduce the vehicle speed assoon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the A/Toil temperature warning light is on maydamage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission parkwarning light ( model)

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control shift lever is not secured in any driveposition while the automatic transmission selec-tor lever is in the P (Park) position, the vehiclemay move unexpectedly.

Shift the transfer control shift lever into the 2H,4H, or 4L position when the warning light comeson.

● When parking, always make sure that thetransfer control shift lever is in 2H, 4H, or 4Land the parking brake is set.

● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that theautomatic transmission P (Park) position willnot function and the transfer control shiftlever is in the N (Neutral) position.

● Failure to engage the transfer shift controllever in 2H, 4H or 4L could result in thevehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting in se-rious personal injury or property damage.

CAUTION

If the ATP light is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) posi-tion will not function and the transfer con-trol shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied,and also warns of a low brake fluid level. If thelight comes on while the engine is running withthe parking brake not applied, stop the vehicleand perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.



2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thebrake system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight (if so equipped)

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this lightcomes on for about 1 second and turns off.

This light warns of low tire pressure.

NISSAN’s low tire pressure warning system is atire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tirepressure of all tires except the spare. When thetire pressure monitoring system warning light islit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the proper



pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire infor-mation placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Eachtire, including the spare, should be checkedmonthly when cold and set to the recommendedinflation pressure as specified in the vehicle plac-ard and owner’s manual.

Low pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with very low tirepressure (lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), the lightwill illuminate and the chime will sound for about10 seconds.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “Starting and driving”section and “Low tire pressure warning system”in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not come on with thekey switch turned ON, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● If the light comes on while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the tireplacard to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If the light stillcomes on while driving after adjustingthe tire pressure, a tire may be flat. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated and the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

CAUTION

● The low tire pressure warning system isnot a substitute for the regular tire pres-sure check. Be sure to check the tirepressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the lowtire pressure warning system may notoperate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluidwarning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Passenger supplemental airbag OFF indicator light (ex-cept Crew Cab models)

The passenger supplemental air bag is equippedwith an ON/OFF switch. The switch is located inthe center of the instrument panel. When theswitch is turned to the ON position, the passen-ger supplemental air bag is enabled and could



inflate in a frontal collision. When the switch isturned to the OFF position, the passengersupplemental air bag is disabled and will notinflate in a frontal collision. The passengersupplemental air bag OFF indicator light on theinstrument panel illuminates when the passengersupplemental air bag ON/OFF switch is turned tothe OFF position. The driver’s side supplementalair bag always remains enabled and is not af-fected by the passenger supplemental air bagON/OFF switch. The key for the passengersupplemental air bag ON/OFF switch should notbe left in the switch. Remove the key after turningthe switch in the desired position. Do not leave akey in the switch. See “Passenger supplementalair bag ON/OFF switch and light” in the “Seats,restraints and supplemental air bag systems”section for details.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltis fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental air bags” section for pre-cautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat beltsystems need servicing and your vehicle must betaken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioner seat belts may not function properly.For additional details see “Supplemental restraintsystem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental air bags” section of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems will not operate in an accident. Tohelp avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Cruise main switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.



4–wheel drive indicator light(if so equipped)

This light comes on when the transfer shift con-trol lever is in the 4H or 4L position.

WARNING

● When parking always make sure thetransfer control lever is in the 2H, 4H or4L position and the parking brake isapplied.

● Failure to engage the transfer controllever in 2H, 4H or 4L could result in thevehicle moving unexpectedly, whichcould cause serious personal injury orproperty damage.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)

If this indicator lamp comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator lamp may also come onsteady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or ifthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make surethe fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly,and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons of fuelin the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lamp shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel filler cap. Ifthe fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The lamp should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the lamp doesnot turn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected bya NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have yourvehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.



Overdrive off indicator light(automatic transmission mod-els only)

This light comes on when the overdrive functionis OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function iscontrolled by the overdrive switch.

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Slip indicator light (if soequipped)

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the system isoperational. If the light does not come on or gooff, have the traction control system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

The system operates in all transmission shift leverpositions, but the system can upshift the trans-mission only as high as the indicated shift leverposition.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle dynamic control offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the vehicledynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. Thisindicates the vehicle dynamic control system isnot operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch againor restart the engine and the system will operatenormally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes onwhen you turn the ignition key to the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on orcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the vehicle dynamiccontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the

system working when starting the vehicle or ac-celerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.



VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle aredisturbed.

Security indicator lightThe security indicator light shows the status ofthe vehicle security system.

The light operates whenever the ignition switch isin the LOCK, OFF, or ACC position.

The vehicle security system has four phases. Foreach phase the operation of the security indicatorlight is different.

How to arm the vehicle security sys-tem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

LIC0359 LIC0093

LIC0053

SECURITY SYSTEM (if so equipped)



3. Close the hood and all doors. Lock all doors.The doors can be locked with the key, powerdoor lock switch or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” later in thissection.

● If a door is open and you pushthe button the doors lock but thehorn does not chirp and the hazard lightsdo not flash.

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator lightcomes on. The SECURITY light stays on forabout 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-onds the vehicle security system automati-cally shifts into the armed phase. TheSECURITY light begins to flash once every 3seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-armtime period, the door is unlocked by the keyor the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned toACC or ON, the system will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe door, the system may not arm. Fur-thermore, if the key is turned exces-sively to the unlock position, the sys-tem may be disarmed when the key isremoved. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors and the hood closedand locked and the ignition key in theOFF position. Turn the ignition key tothe ACC or ON to turn the securitysystem off.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently. In addition, the starter motordoes not operate.

● The alarm automatically turns off after about50 seconds. However, the alarm reactivatesif the vehicle is tampered with again. Thealarm can be shut off by unlocking a doorwith the key, or by pressing the buttonon the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by re-leasing the inside lock knob).

● opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking a door with thekey or by pressing the button on the key-fob.

The alarm does not stop if the ignitionswitch is turned to ACC or ON.



Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold both theand buttons at the same time for at least2 seconds.

The hazard lights will quickly flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold both theand buttons at the same time for at least2 seconds once more.

The hazard lights will quickly flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn feature does not silencethe horn if the alarm is triggered.

If the system does not operate as describedabove, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent (if so equipped) — intermittentoperation can be adjusted by turning theknob toward sA (Slower) or sB (Faster).

s2 Low — continuous low speed operation

s3 High — continuous high speed operation

WIC0325Type A

WIC0639

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



Pull the lever toward you s4 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass, start the engineand push the rear window defroster switch on.The rear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

Type BWIC0640 WIC0327

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH (Crew Cab models only)



NOTE:

The top few rows of wires on the rear win-dow are not part of the rear window de-froster system. These wires make up theantenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Type AWIC0242

Type BWIC0243

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight switch is in the orposition.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights.

WIC0244 WIC0328



TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the front fog lights on, rotate the switch tothe position.

To turn them off, rotate the switch to the OFFposition.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● When stalled or stopped on the road-way under emergency conditions, movethe vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

WIC0245 WIC0247 WIC0329

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH



● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To turn on the cargo bed lamp, push the switch tothe ON position when the ignition key is turned tothe ACC, ON or START position. The indicatorlight in the switch will illuminate.

The cargo lamp will turn off if the switch is pushedto the off position or the ignition key is turned tothe LOCK position.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

LIC0428 WIC0249

CARGO LAMP SWITCH HORN



The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dy-namic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones. Theyare rated at 12 volt, 120 W (10A) maximum.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● This power outlet is not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter unit.

WIC0534Front

WIC0330

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET



● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

The dual 12 volt power outlets can be used topower optional add-on electrical devices.

To access the dual 12 volt power outlets, push inthe tab s1 and remove the cover s2 .

The outlets are rated at 12 volt, 240W (20A)maximum.

CAUTION

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 240W (20A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

Console (if so equipped)WIC0331

Rear (if so equipped)WIC0332 LIC0598

DUAL 12 VOLT POWER OUTLETS (ifso equipped)



● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTA storage compartment is located in the centerbottom of the instrument panel.

STORAGE TRAYS (if so equipped)

WIC0334Automatic transmission model

LIC0635

STORAGE



CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

The front cup holders have a rubber insert thatcan be removed for cleaning and for using largercups.

To open the rear cup holder (Crew Cab modelsonly), pull out fully. To close, push the cup holderin fully.

Manual transmission modelLIC0636

FrontWIC0336

Rear — Crew Cab onlyWIC0337



GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Whenlocking s1 or unlocking s2 the glove box, use themaster key.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

The center console box should not beused while driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

Upper half

Pull up on the lever to open the upper half of theconsole box. The rubber mat may be removed forcleaning.

The upper half of the console box may be used forstorage of cellular phones. An access hole isprovided at the bottom of the upper half of theconsole box for phone cord routing to the poweroutlet.

To route a phone cord to the power outlet:

1. Open the upper half of the console box.

2. Remove the rubber mat, and then removethe cutout area from the mat.

WIC0374 WIC0339



3. Remove the access hole cover.

4. Install the rubber mat.

5. Route the phone cord through the accesshole and plug into the power outlet.

Lower halfPull up on the lever to open the lower half of theconsole box. A power outlet is located inside theconsole box and there is storage for compactdiscs.

GROCERY HOOKS (King Cab only)The grocery hooks allow for 2 standard size plas-tic grocery bags to hang side by side.

Do not apply a total load of more than 55 lbs (25kg) to a single grocery hook.

WIC0340 LIC0373



TUBULAR ROOF RACK (if soequipped)Always evenly distribute the cargo on the tubularroof rack. The maximum total load is 125 lb(57 kg) evenly distributed. Be careful that yourvehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR front and rear). TheGVWR and GAWR are located on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label (located on thedriver’s side door jamb pillar). For more informa-

tion regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-secured cargo could cause personalinjury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

WPD0171



Tubular roof rack crossbar adjustment

The front and rear crossbars can be adjustedforward, backward, or be removed. Use theTorxdriver located in the tool kit to loosen bothcrossbar adjusting screws.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with theTorxdriver by turning counterclockwise.

2. When the clamp is loosened, move thecrossbars so the cargo can be positioned onthe crossbars.

3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws withthe Torxdriver by turning clockwise.

4. Secure the cargo with rope.

5. Always check the tightness of the crossbaradjusting screws.

To remove:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with theTorxdriver by turning counterclockwise.

2. Rotate the clamps.

3. Remove the crossbars.

4. Reverse to install.

5. Always check the tightness of the crossbaradjusting screws.

If you hear wind noise coming from the roof rackwhile driving, adjust the roof rack crossbars to themost rearward position.AIC1147



POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents. 1. Door lock/unlock button

2. Window lock button3. Front passenger side4. Right rear passenger side (Crew Cab

models only)5. Left rear passenger side (Crew Cab

models only)6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled. To opena window, push the switch and hold it down. Toclose a window, pull the switch up. To stop theopening or closing function at any time, simplyrelease the switch.

WIC0376

WINDOWS



Front passenger power window switchThe passenger window switch operates only thecorresponding passenger window. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Rear power window switch (CrewCab models only)The rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding window. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, push the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver side window can be opened or closed.Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

Automatic operationTo fully open the driver window, press the driverwindow switch down to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

WIC0343 WIC0357 WIC0345



MANUAL WINDOWSThe side windows can be opened or closed byturning the hand crank on each door.

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if soequipped)Squeeze the handles of the lever s1 , then slidethe window open s2 .

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position s1 , theinterior light illuminates, regardless of door posi-tion. The light will go off after about 30 minutesunless the ignition key is in the ACC or ONposition.

When the switch is in the normal operation posi-tion s2 , the interior light will stay on for about 30seconds when:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, thepower door lock switch, or a key (whenequipped with vehicle security system) while

WIC0263 WIC0352Dome light — Type A

LIC0630

INTERIOR LIGHTS


Z REVIEW COPY—2004 Truck/Frontier (d22)Owners Manual (owners)—USA_English (nna)06/08/04—debbie X

all doors are closed and the ignition switch isin the LOCK or OFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the 30 second timer isactivated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, thepower door lock switch, or a key (whenequipped with vehicle security system).

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position s3 , theinterior light will not illuminate, regardless of doorposition.

The light will turn off automatically after 30 min-utes while doors are open to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Dome light — Type BWIC0645 WIC0350

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)




MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with power door lock switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Child safety rear door lock(Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-4How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Tubular step rail (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

Fuel filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Tilt operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Vanity mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Outside mirror remote control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17


1. Two master keys (black) with chromeNISSAN brand symbol on one side

2. Key number plateA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have 1 to duplicate from.If you still have a key, this key can be duplicatedby a NISSAN dealer or locksmith.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

ManualTo lock either the driver or passenger side door,turn the key toward the front of the vehicle s1 . Tounlock, turn it toward the rear s2 .

WPD0152

Driver’s sideWPD0153

KEYS DOORS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


Power (if so equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the vehiclesecurity system, the power door lock systemallows you to lock or unlock all doors at the sametime.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again s4 within 5 seconds un-locks all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position s1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position s2 .


Inside lockWPD0155


Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition and any dooropen, all doors will lock and unlock automatically.This helps to prevent the keys from being acci-dently locked inside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(Crew Cab models only)Child safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn theinterior light on, and activate the panic alarm byusing the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effectivedistance depends on the conditions around thevehicle.

As many as 4 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

WPD0037

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(if so equipped)



● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once to indicate alldoors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” later in thissection for details.

● If a door is open and you pushthe button, the doors will lockbut the horn will not beep and the hazardlights will not flash.

WPD0157



Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The interior lights illuminate for 30 secondswhen the interior light switch is in the normaloperation position.

Push the button on the keyfob again with 5seconds.

● All doors unlock.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition and turning to the ON or START position,

locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing theinterior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relockWhen the button on the keyfob is pushed,all doors will lock automatically within 5 minutesunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe key is turned from OFF to ON.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on forabout 30 seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for about 30 seconds, or

● the or button is pushed onthe keyfob.

WPD0158 WPD0159



Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard lights will flash three times to confirmthat the horn beep feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard lights will flash once and the horn willsound once to confirm that the horn beep featurehas been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WIC0325



BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin.

s2 Remove the battery.

s3 Install a new battery with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: Toshiba CR2025 orequivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the manufacturer for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

WPD0160



WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle sA locatedbelow the driver side instrument panel; thehood springs up slightly.

2. Lift the lever sB at the front of the hood withyour fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Remove the support rod from the clamp.

4. Insert the support rod sC into the slot in thefront edge of the hood.

5. When closing the hood, return the supportrod to its original position, lower the hood toapproximately 12 inches above the latch andrelease it. This allows proper engagement ofthe hood latch.

WPD0172

HOOD



1. Tubular step rail2. Front passenger step3. Rear passenger stepThe tubular step rail has a front and rear step forassisting passengers getting into and out of thevehicle.

WPD0173

TUBULAR STEP RAIL (if so equipped)



FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel filler cap in the cap holder whilefueling.

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator lamp to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container on atruck bed liner, rubber truck bed mad,or other insulating material. Static elec-tricity can cause an explosion of flam-mable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicleor trailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

WPD0276 WPD0277

FUEL FILLER LID



– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the lamp illuminates be-

cause the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The lamp should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the lamp

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.

TILT OPERATION (if so equipped)Pull the lock lever down and adjust the steeringwheel up or down to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up firmly to lock the steeringwheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

WPD0167

STEERING WHEEL



VANITY MIRROR (if so equipped)A vanity mirror is located on the rear side of thepassenger sun visor.

INSIDE MIRRORThe night position s1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORSThe outside mirrors can be moved in any direc-tion for a better rear view.

Type A: Adjust to the desired position by movingthe entire mirror assembly.

Type B: Adjust to the desired position by press-ing directly on the mirror surface.

WPD0168 WPD0126

Type AWPD0169

SUN VISORS MIRRORS



Foldable outside mirrorsPush the mirrors backward to fold them.

OUTSIDE MIRROR REMOTECONTROL (if so equipped)

The outside mirror remote control only operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position bymoving the control lever.

Type BWPD0170 WPD0056 WPD0274



WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

TAILGATE

Opening the tailgatePull the tailgate handle upward and lower thetailgate. The support cables hold the tailgateopen.

When closing the tailgate, make sure the latchesare securely locked.

To open the tailgate to the lowest position, lift thetailgate to a 45 degree angle, then release thesupport cables.

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgatedown, unless equipped with Nissan’s BedExtender (accessory) in the deployed posi-tion.

For proper truck box loading see “Loading tips”under the “Vehicle loading information” headingin the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

WPD0175 WPD0176

TRUCK BOX



WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Removing the tailgate

1. Release the tailgate support cables.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

3. Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge.

4. Remove the tailgate from the right sidehinge.

CAUTION

The tailgate is heavy. Be careful not todrop it during removal.

Installing the tailgate1. Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle andinsert into the left side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degreeangle and attach the tailgate support cables.

4. Close the tailgate securely.

IC0175



Locking the tailgateTo lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the pas-senger side of the vehicle s1 . To unlock, turn thekey toward the driver side s2 .

TIE DOWN HOOKS

For your convenience, tie down hooks are placedat each corner of the truck box. These may beused to help secure cargo loaded into the truckbox.

● The weight of the cargo load must be evenlydistributed over both the front and the rearaxles.

● All cargo should be securely fastened withropes or straps to prevent it from shifting orsliding within the vehicle.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

WPD0275 WPD0178




MEMO

4 Heater, air conditioner and audiosystems

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-5Airflow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29


Adjust air flow direction for the driver side s1 ,center s2 , and passenger side s3 ventilators bymoving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator as-semblies.

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● On hot, sunny days, temperatures in aclosed vehicle could quickly becomehigh enough to cause severe or possi-bly fatal injuries to people or animals.Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the support ofothers in your vehicle. Unattended petsshould not be left alone either.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

● Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

WHA0223

VENTILATORS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)

4-2 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems


1. Fan control dial2. Temperature control dial3. Rear window defroster switch (if so

equipped)4. Air flow control dial5. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)6. Air recirculation button (if so equipped)

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and the front and rearfloor outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the front andrear floor outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand the front and rear flooroutlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

The air flow control dial also has intermediatepositions which allow the air flow to be distrib-uted between 2 of the icon positions on the airflow control dial.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To make thetemperature more cool turn the dial more to theleft to make the temperature more warm turn thedial more to the right.

Air recirculation button (if soequipped)

NOTE:

The air recirculation feature is availableonly on those vehicles equipped with airconditioning.

ON position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering thepassenger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button (if soequipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equippedwith an air conditioner.

WHA0235

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3


Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 - 4) position and push thebutton to turn on the air conditioner. The indicatorlight comes on when the air conditioner is oper-ating. To turn off the air conditioner, pushthe button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch (if soequipped)

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window defrosterswitch” in the “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button (if so equipped) tothe off position for normal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Push the button (if so equipped) tothe off position.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.




● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating

This mode directs cooler air from the side andcenter vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.When the temperature control dial is moved tothe full hot or full cool position, the air betweenthe vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-perature.

1. Push the button (if so equipped) tothe off position.






Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode (if so

equipped) automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (ifso equipped)

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 - 4) position, and push in thebutton to activate the air conditioner. When theair conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifyingfunctions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.



4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe on position (indicator light on). Be sureto return the button to the off positionfor normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.





Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.






When the , or positions in betweenare selected, the air conditioner automaticallyturns on (however, the indicator light will notilluminate) if the outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial is turnedto OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flowcontrol dial is turned to a position other thanthe position. This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing outside airto be drawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.


Operating tips● Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIRFLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. The air recirculationbutton should always be in the OFF posi-tion for heating and defrosting.



LHA0420 LHA0421



LHA0422 LHA0423



The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

LHA0424

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER



RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knobto turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio withthe engine not running, the key should be turnedto the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 - 30miles (40 - 48 km), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM



AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high. Decrease thetemperature before use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

LHA0099



1. PRESET ABC button2. Display3. CD button4. CD eject button5. CD insert slot6. MENU button7. AUDIO button8. Station select buttons9. SEEK/TRACK button10. PWR/VOL control knob11. BAND select buttonFM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)PWR/VOL control knob

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,then push the PWR/VOL control knob. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not running,turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radioor CD) that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pushing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

LHA0117



Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance

To adjust the audio levels for bass, treble, fader,and balance, push the AUDIO button and adjustthe level with the SEEK/TRACK button. Press theAUDIO button once for BASS (bass), twice forTREB (treble), 3 times for FAD (fader) and 4

times for BAL (balance). Once the audio level isset the display will return back to radio or CDdisplay mode after 7 seconds or the AUDIObutton can be pressed again within 7 seconds toset the next audio level. Pressing the AUDIObutton a fifth time will return the display back toradio or CD display mode.

Fader adjusts the sound level between the frontand rear speakers, balance adjusts the soundlevel between the right and left speakers.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the MENU button until itbeeps (longer than 2 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. PressSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust thehours.

3. Press the MENU button until the radio beepsto switch to the minute adjustment.

4. The minutes will start flashing. PressSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust the min-utes.

5. Press the MENU button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or you may press the MENUbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select

Push the button to change from AM to FMreception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

SEEK/manual/SCANtuning

When the button is pushed while the radiois playing, tuning mode is cycled between:

SEEK tuning → manual tuning → SCAN mode

“TUNE” and “SCAN” are shown in the display foreach mode. No icon is displayed for SEEK mode.

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driv-ing so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

SEEK tuning

Push the SEEK/TRACK tuning button (or ) for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuningbegins from low to high frequencies or high tolow frequencies, depending on which button is

LHA0118



pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-tion. If using the button, once the highestbroadcasting station is reached, the radio contin-ues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcastingstation. If using the button, once the lowestbroadcasting station is reached, the radio contin-ues in the SEEK mode at the highest broadcast-ing station.

Manual tuning

Use the and buttons for manualtuning. To move quickly through the channels,hold either of the tuning buttons down.

SCAN tuning

Push and hold the SEEK/TRACK tuning button( or ) for more than 1.5 seconds.

SCAN illuminates in the display window, and theradio station blinks. SCAN tuning begins fromlow to high frequencies or high to low frequen-cies, depending on which button is pressed.SCAN tuning stops at each broadcasting stationfor 5 seconds. When scanning, SCAN is solidand the radio station blinks. When temporarilystopped on a station, SCAN blinks and the sta-tion display is solid. Pushing the button againduring this 5 second period stops SCAN tuningand the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations

Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,capable of storing any combination of AM and FMstations.

Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-tween the presets:

A→B→C

The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicatewhich set of presets is active.

To store a radio station in a preset:

1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-SET ABC.

2. Tune to the desired station.

3. Press the desired station select button formore than 3 seconds. For example, in theillustrations, ch2 is to be memorized. Theradio mutes when the select button ispushed.

4. When the indicator illuminates in the displayand the sound resumes, memorizing is com-plete.

5. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radiofuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operationTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot

LHA0119



with the label side up. The compact disc is auto-matically pulled into the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CAUTION

Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

CD button

When the CD button is pushed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the compact disc starts to play.

Track up/down, FF/REV(rewind) buttons

Track up/down

When the button is pushed and releasedwhile the compact disc is playing, the selectionfollowing the present one starts to play from thebeginning. Push the button several times toskip several selections. Each time the button ispushed, the CD advances 1 additional selection.The number appears in the display window.(When the last selection on the compact disc isskipped, the first selection is played.)

When the button is pushed and released, theselection being played returns to the beginning.Push the button several times to skip backseveral selections. Each time the button ispushed, the CD moves back 1 selection.

If the play pattern is in MIX mode when theor button is pushed the next selection will bechosen at random.

FF (Fast Forward)/REV (Reverse)

When the or button is pushed and heldwhile the compact disc is playing, the compactdisc plays at an increased speed while fast for-warding or rewinding. When the button is re-leased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

MENU

When the button is pushed while the com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern changes asfollows:

RPT: The current selection is repeated.

MIX: Selections are played at random, not fol-lowing the sequence on the compact disc. Thesame program may be repeated twice. If thebutton is pushed in the MIX mode, selections willbe chosen at random.

Blank (no symbol): All selections are playedrepeatedly in sequence.

When a new compact disc is inserted, theplay pattern automatically changes to ALL.

CD EJECT button

When the button is pushed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc ejects.

When the button is pushed while the com-pact disc is playing, the compact disc ejects andthe system turns off.

DISC indicator light

This light comes on when a compact discis loaded into the player.



1. Disc loading button2. SEEK/TRACK button3. CD select button4. Band select buttons5. CD insert slot6. CD eject button7. Radio manual tuning buttons8. RPT MIX/PTY button9. CLOCK button10. AUDIO button11. TRAVEL PRESET button12. Station select buttons13. RDS button14. SCAN button15. PRESET SCAN button16. PWR/VOL control knob17. PRESET ABC button

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) CHANGER (if soequipped)

PWR/VOL control knob

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,then push the PWR/VOL control knob. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not running,turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radioor CD) that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off resumes playing.WHA0134



When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pushing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

WHA0065



Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance

Press the AUDIO button to enter the audio adjustmode:

Bass→Mid→Treb→Fade→Bal

Press the TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust to the de-sired levels. The display will return to the regularradio display after 7 seconds, or you may pressthe AUDIO button again to return to the regularradio display.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clockwith the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK buttonagain to turn off the clock display.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until itbeeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. PressTUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust thehours.

3. Press the CLOCK button to switch to theminute adjustment.

4. Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) orSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust the min-utes.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or you may press the CLOCKbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

FM-AM radio operationFM-AM band select

Push the AM or the FM button to change from AMto FM reception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FF—REV

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driv-ing so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

Use the and buttons for manualtuning. To move quickly through the channels,hold the tuning buttons down.

SEEK tuning

Push SEEK/TRACK tuning button ( or ).SEEK tuning begins from low to high frequenciesor high to low frequencies, depending on whichbutton is pressed, and stops at the next broad-casting station. If using the up button, once thehighest broadcasting station is reached, the ra-dio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowestbroadcasting station. If using the down button,once the lowest broadcasting station is reached,the radio continues in the SEEK mode at thehighest broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Push the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. SCAN tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-cient signal strength. When scanning, SCANblinks in the display. Pushing the SCAN buttonagain during this 5 second period stops SCANtuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.



Station memory operation — Travel Presetis OFF

Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,capable of storing any combination of AM, FMand FM RDS stations.

Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-tween the presets:

A→B→C

The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicatewhich set of presets is active.

To store a radio station in a preset:

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press the desired station select button (>2seconds). For example, in the illustrationsch3 is to be memorized.

3. When the indicator illuminates in the stationselection button, a beep will sound indicat-ing memorization is complete. For FM sta-tions, the indicator will turn green. For AMstations, the indicator will turn amber.

4. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radiofuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

LHA0081

WHA0064



Turning ON travel preset

1. Press the TRAVEL PRESET button (<1.5seconds). The green TRAVEL PRESET but-ton indicator turns on.

2. The radio selects the strongest stations inthe area and stores them in Travel Presets A,B and C. 12 FM stations and 6 AM stationsare the default settings. To change the de-fault settings, see “Editing Travel Preset”later in this section.

3. When finished storing radio stations, theradio tunes to the first stored preset of TravelPreset A.

4. If the radio cannot find any stations, the radiodisplays “NO STATION” and mutes the au-dio.

5. If the radio cannot fill all the presets, theremaining presets are stored with 87.9 forFM and 600 for AM.

The TUNE, SCAN, SEEK and preset memoryfunctions are available while Travel Preset modeis on.

Canceling travel preset

Press the TRAVEL PRESET button (<1.5 sec-onds) to clear the Travel Preset memory. Thisturns off the green indicator. The radio returns tothe last used preset of A, B or C in the permanentpreset memory.

LHA0082

LHA0084



Editing travel preset

1. Press and hold the TRAVEL PRESET button(>3 seconds) until the radio beeps to startthe editing mode. The green Travel Presetindicator will flash while in TRAVEL PRESETEDIT mode.

2. The radio displays “TRAVEL EDIT” for 2seconds and then changes to “SET A-*” .

3. Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) toselect a mode.

4. Press the TRAVEL PRESET button to savethe mode.

5. Display is changed to “SET B-*” , repeatsteps 3 and 4.

6. Display is changed to “SET C-*” , repeatstep 3.

7. Press the TRAVEL PRESET button to exitthe edit mode and return to normal mode.

*: AM, FM, FM RDS, Rock, Classic Rock, SoftRock, Top 40, Country, Jazz, Classical, Oldies,News, Sports, Talk.

Storing Travel Preset stations in permanentmemory

1. While in Travel Preset mode, press and holdthe TRAVEL PRESET button until it beeps(>3 seconds).

2. The presets are transferred from Travel Pre-set memory to the permanent presetmemory for A, B, and C. “PRESETSLOADED” is displayed.

3. The TRAVEL PRESET indicator turns off.

Preset scan

Pressing the PRESET SCAN button (<1.5 sec-onds) scans the permanent preset memory that isselected (A, B or C) from 1–6 for 5 seconds. Ifthe Travel Preset is ON, the travel preset that isselected (A, B or C) from 1–6 is scanned for 5seconds.

LHA0085



All preset scan

Pressing the PRESET SCAN button (>1.5 sec-onds) scans all the permanent preset memorybanks (A, B or C) from 1–6 for 5 seconds. If theTravel Preset is ON, all the travel preset memorybanks (A, B or C) from 1–6 are scanned for 5seconds.

Canceling preset scan mode

Pressing any button except CLOCK, EJECT andPTY cancels the Preset Scan mode.

RDS (radio data system)RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radio

stations on the FM band (not AM band) encodedwithin a regular radio broadcast. Currently, mostRDS stations are in large cities, but many stationsare now considering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type, such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Traffic reports about delays or construction.

If the station broadcasts RDS information theRDS icon is displayed. The RDS information willbe displayed according to the option chosen inthe RDS setup mode. (FM & RDS is the default.)Press the RDS button again to display the fre-quency for 3 seconds. The radio will then returnto the normal display. If the station does notbroadcast RDS information, the RDS icon will notbe displayed.

Setting RDS mode

Press and RDS button (>3 seconds) until thedisplay shows “RDS SET MODE” . This displaywill last 2 seconds and then change to“TRAFFIC-OFF” . Press TUNE/FF-REV (or ) to toggle the RDS traffic mode from“OFF” to “ON”. Press the RDS button again toset your RDS traffic mode selection.

The display changes to “SHOW” for the secondpart of the RDS mode selection. Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) to switch between thefollowing RDS display modes:

● “FM & RDS”: the radio display will show thestation’s broadcast frequency and the sta-tion’s name.

● “RDS ONLY”: the radio display will show thestation’s name only.

● “RDS TEMP”: the radio display will show thestation’s name for 5 seconds and then displayonly the radio station’s broadcast frequency.

PTY (program type)

PTY can be used to search for a certain programtype. Certain areas have a limited number ofstations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-mit call letters and frequencies only. Searching orscanning by program type may yield a limitednumber of selections.

1. Press the PTY button. The display changesfrom “RDS PTY SEARCH” to “SELECTBY TUNE” .

2. Press TUNE/FF-REV ( or )up/down button to choose a specific pro-gram type:

ROCK, CLASSIC ROCK, SOFT ROCK,TOP 40, COUNTRY, JAZZ, CLASSICAL,OLDIES, NEWS, SPORTS, TALK, ANY

LHA0086



3. Press the SEEK or SCAN button to searchfor the next station with the selected PTY.The SCAN icon flashes when the SCANbutton is pressed. The radio continues toseek or scan until a radio station is foundmatching the selected PTY

4. Press the PTY button again to cancel thePTY SEEK mode.

Compact disc (CD) player operationTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

CD loading

Press the LOAD button to start CD loadingmode.

The following sequence will occur:

1. The green indicator on the lowest availabledisc select button will start blinking. (Sameas preset memory button.) The displayshows “Please Wait” .

2. The display changes to “Insert Disc” for amaximum of 15 seconds.

3. During the 15 second interval, insert thedisc. The display changes to “LoadingDisc” .

4. The CD will play after the disc is set to a playposition.

5. The indicator changes from blinking greento solid green and the display changes toshow the Disc number icon, Disc number,Track number and Elapsed time.

All disc loading

1. Press and hold the LOAD button until theradio beeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The green indicator on the lowest availabledisc select button will start blinking. (Sameas preset memory button.) The displayshows “Please Wait”.

3. The display changes to “Insert Disc” for amaximum of 15 seconds.

4. During the 15 second interval, insert thedisc. The display changes to “LoadingDisc”.

5. The indicator changes from blinking greento solid green.

6. The disc number icon is turned on.

LHA0075



7. Repeat steps 2–5 until all discs are loaded,then the last loaded disc will begin to play.The display shows the Disc number, Tracknumber and Elapsed Time.

Selected disc loading

1. Press an available disc select button whoseindicator is off. The display shows “PleaseWait”.

2. The green indicator starts blinking and thedisplay shows “Insert Disc” for 15 sec-onds.

3. Insert the CD. The display shows “LoadingDisc”.

4. The CD will play after the disc is set to a playposition.

5. The indicator color changes from blinkinggreen to solid green and the displayshows the Disc icon, Disc number, Tracknumber and Elapsed Time.

If a disc is not inserted within 15 seconds or if theload button is pressed during load sequence, theentire disc load sequence will be canceled.

Disc play

Press the CD button. If a CD is loaded and theradio is playing, the radio turns off and the lastloaded disc starts to play.

Selected disc play

1. Press the disc select button whose disc iconis displayed.

2. The indicator blinks green during thechange and the display shows “ChangingDisc” .

3. The CD plays after the disc is set to a playposition.

4. The indicator changes from blinking greento solid green and the display shows theDisc number, Track number and ElapsedTime.

FF (fast forward) REW(rewind) buttons

When the TUNE/FF-REV ( or ) buttonis pressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When the button isreleased, the CD returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

When is pressed while the compact disc isplaying, the selection following the present onestarts to play from the beginning. Press sev-eral times to skip several selections. Each timethe button is pressed, the CD advances 1 addi-tional selection. The track number appears in thedisplay window. (When the last selection on thecompact disc is skipped, the first selection isplayed.)

When is pressed, the selection being playedreturns to the beginning. Press several timesto skip back several selections. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD moves back 1 selec-tion. If the play pattern is in MIX mode when thebutton is pressed the next random selection willbe played.

LHA0076



Repeat/Mix

Press the RPT MIX button to change CD playpatterns:

Repeat→Mix→All Mix→Normal Play

Repeat

Press the RPT MIX button (<1.5 seconds) onceto repeat the current track. The “1” icon is turnedon, and the display shows “Repeat Track” for 2seconds. The display then shows the Track num-ber and Elapsed time as normal.

Mix

Press the RPT MIX button (<1.5 seconds) againto start shuffle play of the current disc. The “MIX”icon is turned on and the display shows “MixTracks” for 2 seconds. The display then showsthe Track number and Elapsed time as normal.

All mix

Press the RPT MIX button (<1.5 seconds) againto start shuffle play of all discs. The “MIX” icon isturned on, and the display shows “Mix AllTracks” for 2 seconds. The display then showsthe Track number and Elapsed time as normal.Also, the indicators of the loaded discs are turnedon with amber color. (Green for current disc.)

Normal play

Press the RPT MIX button (<1.5 seconds) againto return to normal play mode. The “MIX” icon andthe amber LEDs are turned off. The displayshows “Normal Play” for 2 seconds. The dis-play then shows the Track number and Elapsedtime as normal.

CD scan

1 Disc All Tracks

Press the SCAN button (<1.5 seconds) to scanall tracks of the current disc for 7 seconds pertrack. The display shows “Disc Scan” for 2seconds, and then shows the track number andelapsed time as normal. The SCAN icon isflashed during Scan mode.

The Scan mode is canceled once it scansthrough all tracks on the disc, or if the SCANbutton is pressed during Scan mode.

LHA0077 LHA0078



All Discs, 1 Track

Press and hold the SCAN button (>1.5 seconds)to scan the first track of all the loaded discs for 7seconds per track. The display shows “All DiscScan” for 2 seconds, and then shows the tracknumber and elapsed time as normal. The SCANicon is flashed during Scan mode.

The Scan mode is canceled once it scansthrough all the loaded discs, or if the SCANbutton is pressed during Scan mode.

Eject CD

Current disc

1. Press the button.

2. The green indicator starts to blink and thedisplay shows “Disc Eject” for 2 seconds.The display then changes to “EjectingDisc” .

3. The disc ejects. Remove the disc. (If the discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.)

4. The indicator and symbol for the disc areturned off.

Select a disc

1. Press the desired disc, then pressthe button.

2. The green indicator starts blinking and thedisplay shows “Disc Eject” for 2 seconds.The display then changes to “EjectingDisc” .

3. The disc ejects. Remove the disc. (If the discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.)

4. The indicator and symbol for the disc areturned off.

LHA0079



All discs

1. Press and hold the button until itbeeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. Lowest used disc number indicator blinksgreen and display shows “All Disc Eject”for 2 seconds. The display then changes to“Ejecting Disc” .

3. When a disc is removed, the indicator anddisc icon will be turned off, and then the nextdisc will emerge, and so on.

4. The display will be turned off after all discsare ejected and removed.

If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or ifthe button is pressed again during theEject sequence, the entire disc Eject sequencewill be canceled.

CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the centerto the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Donot wipe the disc using a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0080

LHA0049



1. SEEK up button2. Mode button3. SEEK down button4. Volume control button

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The steering wheel switch for audio controls ismounted on the left side of the steering wheel.

Press the MODE button to turn the radio on or, ifthe radio is already on, to switch between theRadio presets (A, B or C) and CD Mode.

A→B→C→CD Mode

The last CD that was loaded starts to play whenin CD Mode. If there is no CD loaded, the CDchanger enters Disc Loading Mode.

If in Radio presets A, B or C:

● Press or (<1.5 seconds) toadvance to the next preset station or toreturn to the previous preset station.

● Hold down or (>1.5 sec-onds). The radio will seek up or down to thenext radio station.

If in CD Mode:

● Press or (<1.5 seconds) toadvance to the next selection on the CD orreturn to the previous selection on the CD.

● Hold down or (>1.5 seconds)to advance to the next CD or return to theprevious CD.

Volume control is located on the side of the audiocontrol switch. Press the top of the volume con-trol to increase volume. Press the bottom of thevolume control to decrease volume.

ANTENNAThe antenna cannot be shortened, but can beremoved. When you need to remove the antenna,turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock-wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specificationusing a suitable tool such as an open-endwrench. The antenna rod tightening specificationis 3.4 - 3.6 N·m (30 - 32 in-lb). Do not use pliersto tighten the antenna as they can leave marks onthe antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot behand tightened to the proper specification.

CAUTION

Always properly tighten the antenna rodduring installation or the antenna rod maybreak during vehicle operation.

WHA0234



When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingcautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad-versely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system. Do not route the antennawire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO




MEMO

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Low tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 5-10Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Auto-lock free-running hubs. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31


WARNING

● On hot, sunny days, temperatures in aclosed vehicle could quickly becomehigh enough to cause severe or possi-bly fatal injuries to people or animals.Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the support ofothers in your vehicle. Unattended petsshould not be left alone either.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● If a special body, camper, or otherequipment is added for recreational orother usage, follow the manufacturer’srecommendation to prevent carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle. Do notoccupy these areas while the engine isrunning even if the vehicle is parked.Some recreational vehicle appliancessuch as stoves, refrigerators, heaters,etc. may also generate carbonmonoxide.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-sure warning system. It monitors tire pressure ofall tires except the spare. When the low tirepressure warning light it lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

The low tire pressure warning system will activateonly when the vehicle is driven at speeds above

20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, this system may notdetect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for ex-ample a flat tire while driving).

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature. Low outside temperaturecan lower the temperature of the air inside the tirewhich can cause a lower tire inflation pressure.This may cause the low tire pressure warninglight to illuminate.

If the warning light illuminates in low ambienttemperature as described above, check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pressure shownon the tire placard to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF.

Frequently check the tire pressure and adjustpressure of each tire properly.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure(lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), the low tire pres-sure warning light comes on and the chimesounds for about 10 seconds.

For additional information regarding the abovewarning, see “Warning/indicator lights and au-dible reminders” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the tire placard to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.If you have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible. (See“Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”section for changing a flat tire.)


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

Starting and driving 5-3


CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and thelow tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interface, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired op-eration of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-ger cars to make them capable of performing in avariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allowingyou to anticipate problems. However, they are notdesigned for cornering at the same speeds asconventional two-wheel drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed to per-form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If atall possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautionslater in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat beltas outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental air bags” section of this manual,and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted or improperly belted person is



significantly more likely to be injured orkilled than a person properly wearing aseat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your

ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal andoff-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forleisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are lesscapable than four-wheel drive models for roughroad driving and extrication when stuck in deepsnow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

● Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. Off-road vehicles cantip over sideways much more easilythan they can forward or backward.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you may stall. Ifyou drive down them, you may not beable to control your speed. If you driveacross them, you may roll over.

● Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-offor other hazard that could cause anaccident.

● If your engine stalls or you cannot makeit to the top of a steep hill, never at-tempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear. Neverback down in N (Neutral) or with theclutch depressed (manual transmissionvehicles), using only the brake, as thiscould cause loss of control.

● Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat and fade,resulting in loss of control and an acci-dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a lowgear to control your speed.



● Unsecured cargo can be thrown aroundwhen driving over rough terrain. Prop-erly secure all cargo so it will not bethrown forward and cause injury to youor your passengers.

● To avoid raising the center of gravityexcessively, do not exceed the ratedcapacity of the roof rack (if soequipped) and evenly distribute theload. Secure heavy loads in the cargoarea as far forward and as low as pos-sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tireslarger than specified in this manual.This could cause your vehicle to rollover.

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

● Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengers havetheir seat belts fastened.

● Always drive with the floor mats inplace as the floor may become hot.

● Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher centerof gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

● Do not drive beyond the performancecapablity of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

● Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

● If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at high speeds.Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehiclehas a higher center of gravity than atwo-wheel drive vehicle. The vehicle isnot designed for cornering at the samespeeds as conventional two-wheeldrive vehicles. Failure to operate thisvehicle correctly could result in loss ofcontrol and/or a rollover accident.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,or radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. See“Brake system” later in this section for“Wet brakes”.

● Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

● Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent maintenancemay be required. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.”



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

On automatic transmission models, the ignitionlock is designed so the key cannot be turned toLOCK position and removed until the shift selec-tor lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCKposition.

When the key cannot be turned to the LOCKposition, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ONposition.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannotmoved out of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

WSD0041

IGNITION SWITCH



MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes a device that helpsprevent accidental removal of the key while driv-ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ONposition, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, thenturn the key to LOCK.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking thesteering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake and clutch fluid, and windowwasher fluid as frequently as possible, or atleast whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

WSD0052

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE



1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position or ifthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depressthe clutch pedal to the floor while crankingthe engine.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

STARTING THE ENGINE



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 2 or 1.Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● On slippery roads, do not downshift.This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress thefoot brake pedal before attempting to movethe shift selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turnedto the LOCK position or if the key is re-moved.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ACC position. Thisallows the vehicle to be moved if the bat-tery is discharged. The shift selector levercan also be moved if the ignition switch isin the ON position and the foot brake pedalis depressed.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE



To move the selector lever:

: Pull lever toward you to shift

: Shift without pulling lever

Shifting (KA24DE engine)

Pull the shift selector lever to shift into P (Park), R(Reverse) or from D (Drive) to 2 or 1.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed and the selectorlever button pushed in to move the selectorlever from the N (Neutral) or any drive po-sition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

Shifting from P (Park)

If the ignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed, but the shift se-lector lever still cannot be moved out of P (Park),follow these instructions.

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position.


3. Reinsert the key and turn it to the ACCposition.

4. Depress the foot brake pedal and move theshift selector lever to N (Neutral).

5. Start the engine.

These instructions for starting the vehicle in N(Neutral) should only be used until service can beobtained at a NISSAN dealership.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selecting R(Reverse) position. The brake pedal must bedepressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in to move the selector lever from P(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R(Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

WSD0068



D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

2 (Second gear)

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.

Do not shift into the 2 position at speeds above58MPH (92 km/h). Do not exceed 58 MPH (92km/h) in the 2 position.

1 (Low gear)

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.

Do not shift into the 1 position at speeds above30 MPH (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30 MPH (48km/h) in the 1 position.

To move the selector lever:

: Depress the button to shift

: Shift without depressing button

Shifting (VG33E or VG33ER engine)

Push the shift selector lever button to shift into P(Park), R (Reverse) or from D (Drive) to 2. Allother positions can be selected without pushingthe button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed and the selectorlever button pushed in to move the selectorlever from the N (Neutral) or any drive po-sition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

Shifting from P (Park)

If the ignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed, but the shift se-lector lever still cannot be moved out of P (Park),follow these instructions.

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position.


WSD0061



3. Reinsert the key and turn it to the ACCposition.

4. Depress the foot brake pedal and move theshift selector lever to N (Neutral).

5. Start the engine.

These instructions for starting the vehicle in N(Neutral) should only be used until service can beobtained at a NISSAN dealership.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selecting R(Reverse) position. The brake pedal must bedepressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in to move the selector lever from P(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R(Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.


1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowing through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.


WSD0062



Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed and the shiftselector lever button pushed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock and push the shift selector lever button. Theshift selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral).However, the steering wheel will be locked un-less the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-tion.

To release the shift lock, complete the followingprocedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.


3. Remove the shift lock cover sA .

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockslot, and push down sB .

5. Push the shift selector lever button sC andmove the shift selector lever to N (Neutral)position sD while holding down the shiftlock.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Overdrive switch (KA24DE enginetype a)

ON: For typical driving, push the over-drive switch ON with the se-lector lever in the D (Drive) position.The transmission is upshifted intoOVERDRIVE as the vehicle speedincreases.

Overdrive does not engage until the enginehas reached operating temperature.

WSD0069



OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking is nec-essary push the switch OFF .The indicator light in the instrumentpanel comes on at this time. Whencruising at a low speed or climbinga gentle slope, you may feel uncom-fortable shift shocks as the trans-mission repeatedly shifts between3rd and overdrive. In this case, setthe overdrive switch in theOFF position.

When driving conditions change, reset the over-drive switch in the ON position to turn theoverdrive on. The indicator light goes out at thistime.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the overdrive switchset in the OFF position. This reduces fueleconomy.

Overdrive switch (KA24DE enginetype b)

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: For normal driving the overdriveswitch is engaged. The transmissionis upshifted into overdrive as thevehicle speed increases.

The overdrive does not engage until theengine has reached operating temperature.

OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking isnecessary, push the overdriveswitch once. The O/D OFF indicatorlight illuminates at this time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftshocks as the transmission shifts between 3rdgear and overdrive repeatedly. In this case, pressthe overdrive switch.

When driving conditions change, press the over-drive switch to turn the Overdrive on. The O/DOFF indicator light goes out.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the O/D OFF lightilluminated. This reduces fuel economy.

WSD0070



Overdrive switch (VG33E or VG33ERengine)

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and theshift selector lever in the D (Drive)position, the transmission upshiftsinto Overdrive as vehicle speedincreases.

Overdrive does not engage until the enginehas reached operating temperature.

OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking is nec-essary push the Overdrive switchonce. The O/D OFF indicator lightin the instrument panel comes on atthis time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftshocks as the transmission shifts into and out ofOverdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. TheO/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panelcomes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.This reduces fuel economy.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-ing to a lower gear. This may cause aloss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may cause clutchdamage.

● Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

● Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running (for example, at a stoplight), shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.

WSD0063



Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift intothe appropriate gear, then release the clutchslowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. Ifthe clutch pedal is not fully depressed before thetransmission is shifted, a gear noise may beheard. Transmission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rdand 4th up to 5th gear in sequence according tovehicle speed.

You cannot shift directly from 5th gear into R(Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then into R(Reverse).

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R(Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral), thenrelease the clutch pedal. Depress the clutchpedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First).

If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel drive, see“ Transfer case shifting procedures” later in thissection.

Suggested upshift speedsThe following are suggested vehicle speeds forshifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to roadconditions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

● Two-wheel drive models and four-wheeldrive models (2H and 4H position):

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

● 4–wheel drive model (4L position):

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 12 (19)

3rd to 4th 20 (32)

4th to 5th 22 (35)

Suggested maximum speed in eachgear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Always observe posted speed limits, and driveaccording to the road conditions, which will en-sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it may causeengine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Allowable maximum speed in each gear:

2–wheel drive models

GEAR MPH (km/h)1st 30 (49)2nd 55 (89)3rd 80 (129)4th —5th —

WSD0064



4–wheel drive models

2H/4H position

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 25 (40)

2nd 43 (69)

3rd 68 (109)

4th —

5th —

4L position

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 12 (19)

2nd 22 (35)

3rd 30 (48)

4th —

5th —

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brakesA .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-tion.

Automatic transmission models:Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. Pull out the parking brake release lever sB .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

WSD0065

PARKING BRAKE



1. Cruise control main switch2. RES/ACCEL switch3. CANCEL switch4. COAST/SET switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned ONwhile pushing the RES/ACCEL,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (locatedon the steering wheel). To properly set thecruise control system, use the following pro-cedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressingthe clutch pedal when the cruise control isset. Should this occur, depress the clutchpedal and turn the main switch off imme-diately. Failure to do so may cause enginedamage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

WSD0066

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)



● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the RES/ACCEL or COAST/SETswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the shift selector lever to N(Neutral) (automatic transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the RES/ACCEL switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the RES/ACCEL switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RES/ACCEL switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE



● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use 4H or 4L position only whennecessary. Four-wheel drive operation low-ers fuel economy.

To move the transfer case lever:

: Push down on the lever to shift

: Shift without pushing down on the lever

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURES

WARNING

● When parking always make sure thetransfer control lever is in the 2H, 4H or4L position and the parking brake isapplied.

WSD0067

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD)



● Do not leave the transfer control lever inthe N (Neutral) position. Otherwise, thevehicle could roll unexpectedly even ifthe manual transmission is in any gearor the automatic transmission is in theP (Park) position. This could result inserious personal injury or propertydamage.

● Failure to engage the transfer controllever in 2H, 4H or 4L could result in thevehicle moving unexpectedly, whichcould cause serious personal injury orproperty damage.

CAUTION

Do not drive on dry hard surface roads infour-wheel drive. Driving on dry hard sur-faces in 4H or 4L may cause unnecessarynoise, tire wear, and increased fuel con-sumption. NISSAN recommends driving inthe 2H position under these conditions.

2H — (2WD, high range) Only the rear wheelsare driven. Use for driving under the same condi-tions as standard 2WD vehicles or state dyna-mometer I/M testing.

4H — (4WD, high range) Four wheels are driven.Use when driving on roads where it is difficult to

drive in the 2H position (for example, driving atnormal speeds on snow covered, icy, wet, muddyor sandy roads).

The 4H position provides greater power andtraction. Avoid excessive speed as it will causeincreased fuel consumption, higher oil tempera-ture and could damage drivetrain components.Speed over 50 MPH (80 km/h) in 4H are notrecommended.

4L — (4WD, low range) Four wheels are driven.Use when climbing or descending steep hills, orduring driving in sand, mud or deep snow. The 4Lposition provides maximum power and traction.Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as therecommended maximum speed is approximately30 MPH (48 km/h).

N — No wheels are driven. Always keep thetransfer lever out of the N (Neutral) position. Shiftthe lever quickly and smoothly when movingacross the N (Neutral) position with the vehiclestopped.

AUTO-LOCK FREE-RUNNING HUBS

The auto-lock free-running hub is designed toallow for automatic four-wheel drive engagementwhen the shift lever is moved to the 4H or 4Lposition. Follow these operational cautions:

CAUTION

● The auto-locking hubs will make aclicking noise when engaging and dis-engaging. This is normal.

SD0021


Z REVIEW COPY—2004 Truck/Frontier (d22)Owners Manual (owners)—USA_English (nna)06/08/04—rhinson X

● Accelerating quickly from a stop aftershifting from two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive may not allow engagementof the auto-locking free-running hubsand may cause a clattering noise. If thisoccurs, release the accelerator pedal toreduce the engine speed or stop thevehicle. Continued use of the vehiclewith this noise may damage the hublock.

● If the auto-locking hubs make a clatter-ing noise after shifting from four-wheeldrive to two-wheel drive, stop and movethe vehicle in reverse gear, in a straightline, about 7 to 10 feet (2 to 3 m).

● Under extremely cold conditions [below5°F (-15°C)], the front axle shafts mayrotate even with the transfer lever in the2H position. If this occurs, the auto-locking hubs may make a clatteringnoise. To avoid this, drive first in four-wheel drive to warm up the vehicle anddifferential gear oil. Then, shift to two-wheel drive.

● In cold weather, it may be necessary toreduce speed or stop the vehicle in or-der to shift from two-wheel drive tofour-wheel drive.

● When shifting into or out of four-wheeldrive while driving, do not stop shiftlever movement midway. An incompleteshift may cause a clattering noise fromthe auto-locking hubs. Continued useof the vehicle with this noise may dam-age the hub lock. Drive in four-wheeldrive to stop the noise. Shift to two-wheel drive as described.

For Automatic transmission models:

When moving the transfer lever from 4H or 4L to4L or 4H, you must always move it quicklythrough the N position. If you are slow to shift, theengine idle speed will allow the transfer gears tospeed up and gear clashing will occur.

Do not move the transfer lever from 4H or 4L to4L or 4H, from 2H to 4L and from 4L to 2H withthe engine turned off. Otherwise, you may havedifficulty in moving the transfer lever to the de-sired position.

Do not leave the transfer lever in the N positionwith the engine running. Stopping with the trans-fer case in the N position may cause gear grind-ing when selecting another gear. Changing thetransfer case gear quickly and smoothly will elimi-nate this.



TO SHIFTTRANSFER CASE

SHIFT PROCEDURE FOR AUTO-LOCK FREE RUNNING HUBS

From 2H to 4H Move the transfer case shift lever to 4H at speeds below 25 MPH (40 km/h). It is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal. Perform this operation whendriving straight, not while cornering.

From 4H to 2H

1. Move the transfer case shift lever to 2H. This can be done at any speed, and it is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal. Perform this operation whendriving straight, not while cornering.2. Disengage the AUTO-LOCK hubs following the procedure outlined below.NOTE: The 4WD indicator light may not turn off immediately under certain driving conditions, such as when the vehicle is driven uphill.This is normal and it will shut off as the vehicle is driven further.AUTO-LOCK HUB DISENGAGEMENT (FREE MODE)The AUTO-LOCK hubs will not disengage until the vehicle is completely stopped and is then moved in a straight line, approxi-mately 7-10 ft (2-3 m), in the opposite direction of travel. For example:If you were driving the vehicle forward, stop and move the vehicle 7-10 ft (2-3 m) backward.If you were driving the vehicle in reverse, stop and move the vehicle 7-10 ft (2-3 m) forward.It is not necessary to immediately return the AUTO-LOCK hubs to FREE MODE when shifting from 4H to 2H. The vehicle maybe operated under normal 2H conditions with the AUTO-LOCK hubs engaged. However, disengaging the AUTO-LOCK hubswill allow for better fuel economy, quieter ride and less component wear. Leaving the hubs locked while driving in 2H may bedesirable so that you can easily shift to 4H at speeds greater than 25 MPH (40 km/h).

From 4H to 4L or 4L to4H

1. Stop the vehicle.Keep the engine running.

2. Depress the clutch pedal, or place the transmission selector lever in the N (Neutral) position.3. Depress the transfer case shift lever and move it to the 4L or 4H position. Change gears quickly and smoothly.

From 2H to 4L


2. Depress the clutch pedal, or place the transmission selector lever in the N (Neutral) position.3. Depress the transfer case shift lever and move it to the 4L position. Change gears quickly and smoothly.

From 4L to 2H


2. Depress the clutch pedal, or place the transmission selector lever in the N (Neutral) position.3. Depress the transfer case shift lever and move it to the 2H position. Change gears quickly and smoothly.4. Disengage the AUTO-LOCK hubs following the procedure outlined above.



WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● The transfer control lever mustbe in the 2H, 4H or 4L position and theparking brake set to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling.

● Never place the transfer control lever inthe N (Neutral) position. Otherwise, thevehicle could roll unexpectedly even ifthe manual transmission is in gear orthe automatic transmission is in the P(Park) position. This could result in se-rious injury or property damage.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forautomatic transmission models or in anappropriate gear for manual transmis-sion models. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unexpectedlyor roll away and result in an accident.Make sure the shift lever has beenpushed as far forward as it can go andcannot be moved without depressingthe foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● If the ATP lamp is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) po-sition will not function and the transfercontrol shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position. Failure to engage the transfercontrol lever in the 2H, 4H or 4L positioncould result in the vehicle moving unex-pectedly, resulting in serious personalinjury or property damage.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-tion. When parking on an uphill grade, placethe shift lever in 1st gear.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s1

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: s3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will bemuch harder to operate.

POWER STEERING



The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes sothe wheels do not lock when braking abruptly orwhen braking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheel andvaries the brake fluid pressure to prevent each

wheel from locking and sliding. By preventingwheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv-ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system (4-wheel ABS)

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operation

The anti-lock brake system does not operate atspeeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (Thespeeds vary according to road conditions.)

When driving, the anti-lock brake system con-trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road.Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve-hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. Thesystem detects the wheel rotation rate and elec-tronically controls the pressure applied to eachbrake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom-panied by noise usually occurs while the ABSsystem is operating. Such vibration and noiseencountered during abrupt braking is not a prob-lem, but indicates that the system is functioning

BRAKE SYSTEM



properly. However, the pulsation may indicatethat road conditions are hazardous and extra careis required while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronicsensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by acomputer. The computer has a built-in diagnosticfeature that tests the system each time you startthe engine and move the vehicle at a low speed inforward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,you may hear a ‘‘clunk’’ noise and/or feel a pulsa-tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is notan indication of any malfunction. If the computersenses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lockbrake system off and turns on the ABS brakewarning light on the instrument panel. The brakesystem then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will not operate, but the standardvehicle brake system will continue to operatenormally. The ABS brake warning light will thencome on.

If the light comes on during the self-test or whiledriving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer forrepair.

WARNING

● The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-cidents resulting from careless or dan-gerous driving techniques. It can helpmaintain vehicle control during brakingon slippery surfaces, but remember thatthe stopping distance on slippery sur-faces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with the anti-lock brakesystem. Stopping distances may alsobe longer on rough, gravel or snow cov-ered roads, or if you are using tirechains. Tire type and condition may alsoaffect braking effectiveness. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re-sponsibility for safety of self and othersrests in the hands of the driver.

● Tire type and condition of tires may alsoaffect braking effectiveness.

● When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.

● When installing a spare tire, make sureit is the proper size and type as speci-fied on the tire placard. For tire placardlocation information, refer to “Tire plac-ard” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.


Z REVIEW COPY—2004 Truck/Frontier (d22)Owners Manual (owners)—USA_English (nna)06/09/04—tmchalpi X

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detectthese movements and control the braking andengine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system is operating, the slip indicator in theinstrument panel blinks.

● When only the traction control system (TCS)portion of the vehicle dynamic control sys-tem is operating, the slip indicator will alsoblink.

● If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi-tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamiccontrol off indicator light” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section.

● Indicator lightIf malfunction occurs in the system, the

and indicator lights come on inthe instrument panel.As long as these warning lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake LimitedSlip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction.The ABLS system works when one of the drivingwheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The

ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel whichdistributes the driving power to the other drivewheel. If the vehicle is operated with the vehicledynamic control system off using the VDC OFFswitch, all VDC and ABLS functions will beturned off. The ABS will still operate with the VDCsystem off. If the ABLS system is activated, theslip indicator light will blink and you may hear aclunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal.

While the VDC system is operating, you may feela pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working prop-erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The vehicle dynamic control system isdesigned to help improve driving stabil-ity but does not prevent accidents dueto abrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly andthe vehicle dynamic control off indica-tor light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not NISSAN approvedfor your vehicle or are extremely dete-riorated the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehicle handlingperformance, and the vehicle dynamiccontrol off indicator light may come on.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)



● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the vehicle dynamic control system maynot operate properly and the vehicledynamic control off indicator light maycome on. Do not drive on these types ofroads.

● When driving on unstable surfaces suchas a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,the vehicle dynamic control off indica-tor light may illuminate. This is not amalfunction. Restart the engine afterdriving onto a stable surface

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the vehicle dy-namic control system may not operateproperly and the vehicle dynamic con-trol off indicator light may come on.

● The vehicle dynamic control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ in the‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of thismanual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘Main-tenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For details, see ‘‘Changing engine coolant’’ in the‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper size for

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



the tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sug-gestions. Use only SAE Class “S”chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of a wintertraction device (tire chains or cables). Theminimum clearances are determined usingthe factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain ten-sioners when recommended by the tirechain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibil-ity of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loadingyour vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehiclehandling and performance may be adverselyaffected.

Never install tire chains on spare tires. Donot use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

An engine block heater to assist in extreme coldtemperature starting is available through aNISSAN dealer.



WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-grounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can beinjured by an electrical shock if you use anungrounded connection.



6 In case of emergency

First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-15


A first aid kit is located behind the driver seat. Toremove the first aid kit:

s1 Squeeze the latch buttons.

s2 Pull the two straps apart to unfasten.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-sure warning system. It monitors tire pressure ofall tires except the spare. When the low tirepressure warning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle isbeing driven with a flat tire or low tire pressure(lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), the low tire pres-sure warning system will activate and warn you ofit by the low tire pressure warning light. Thissystem will activate only when the vehicle isdriven at speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Formore details, please refer to “Warning/indicatorlights and audible reminders” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section, and “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “Starting and driving”section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the tire placard to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.If you have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

LCE0068

FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped) FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the manual transmission into R(Reverse), or the automatic transmissioninto P (Park).

WARNING

● The transfer control lever mustbe in the 2H, 4H or 4L position.

● Do not leave the transfer control lever inthe N (Neutral) position. Otherwise, thevehicle could roll unexpectedly even ifthe manual transmission is in any gearor the automatic transmission is in theP (Park) position. This could result inserious personal injury or propertydamage.

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the auto-matic transmission into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the low tire pressure warn-ing system will not function. Contactyour NISSAN dealer as soon possiblefor tire replacement and/or system re-setting. (For models with the low tirepressure warning system)

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

WCE0044

In case of emergency 6-3


Getting the spare tire and toolsFor King Cab models:

● Move the driver’s seatback fully forward.

● Remove the jack and wheel nut wrench fromthe tool case located behind the driver’sseat.

● Remove the jack rod located behind thedriver’s seat.

For Crew Cab models:

● Tilt the rear bench seat forward.

● Remove the jack, jack rod, and tool caselocated behind the rear bench seat.

All models:

1. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench to forma handle.

2. Find the oval-shaped opening under themiddle of the tailgate. Pass the T-shapedend of the jack rod through the opening anddirect it toward the spare tire winch, locateddirectly above the spare tire.

Type AWCE0064

Type BLCE0069 WCE0065



3. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod intothe T-shaped opening of the spare tirewinch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rodengaged in the spare tire winch and turn thejack rod counterclockwise to lower thespare tire.

4. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,reach under the vehicle, remove the retainerchain, and carefully slide the tire from underthe rear of the vehicle.

Removing wheel cover

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

Remove the wheel cover as follows:

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover orwheel surface.

WCE0070

Type AWCE0060



Type A:

Firmly grasp the center wheel cap and turn eitherclockwise or counterclockwise to remove.

Type B:

1. Wrap the end of a screwdriver with a cloth.

2. Pry the center wheel cap off by pushing onthe handle of the screwdriver in the directionshown.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Type BWCE0071

FrontWCE0061



Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Under some conditions there will not besufficient clearance to use the primary rearjacking point on vehicles equipped with 15inch wheels. If this occurs, use the alternatejack-up point s1 for vehicles equipped with15 inch wheels. When using the alternatejack-up point, position the jack on the axle asclose as possible to the tire that needs to bechanged.

Rear (4–wheel drive models)WCE0072

Rear (2–wheel drive models)WCE0073

Rear (15 inch wheel alternate jack-uppoint)

WCE0361



The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until thetire clears the ground.

When using alternate rear jack-uppoint for 15 inch wheels, raise the ve-hicle so that the tire is no more than 2inches (50 mm) off the ground.

4. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-hicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehiclehas been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thespecified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

WCE0063



COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tireplacard affixed to the inside of the glovebox lid.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-ing plate on the wheel and then lift thespare tire.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING



WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift leverto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch offall unnecessary electrical systems (lights,heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WCE0066



WARNING

● Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. At-tempting to do so may cause transmis-sion or other vehicle damage.

● Three-way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushing. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Never try to start the vehicle by towingit. When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toN (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (automatic transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).Open all the windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control to maximumhot and fan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing along hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fastidle (approximately 1,500 r/min) until thetemperature gauge indicator returns to nor-mal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. Do not open thehood further until no steam or coolant can beseen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

7. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (rear) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

● When towing automatic or manualtransmission models with the frontwheels on the ground or on towingdollies:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion, and secure the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with a rope orsimilar device. Never secure the steer-ing wheel by turning the ignition key tothe LOCK position. This may damagethe steering lock mechanism.

● If you have to tow manual transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground (if you do not use towing dol-lies) or four wheels on the ground:

● Always release the parking brake.

● Move the transmission shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position.

● Observe the following restricted tow-ing speeds and distances for manualtransmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles (805km)

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.

ACE1019



Four-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or place the ve-hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground, asthis may cause serious and expensivedamage to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with the frontwheels raised always use towing dolliesunder the rear wheels.

● When towing automatic or manualtransmission models with the frontwheels on the ground or on towingdollies:

● To disengage auto-lock free- runninghubs see the “Starting and driving”section for details.

● Move the transfer case shift lever tothe 2H position.

● Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-sition, and secure the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with arope or similar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turning the ig-nition key to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

● If you have to tow manual transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground (if you do not use towing dol-lies) or four wheels on the ground:

● To disengage auto-lock free- runninghubs see the “Starting and driving”section for details.

● Move the transfer case shift lever tothe 2H position.

● Move the transmission shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position.

● Always release the parking brake.

● Observe the following restricted tow-ing speeds and distances for manualtransmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles (805km)

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.

ACE0705



VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the vehicle recovery hooks ormain structural members of the vehicle.Otherwise, the vehicle body will bedamaged.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (reverse)and D (drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.




MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable tothe effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. After wax-ing, polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up residue and to avoid a “weathered” ap-pearance.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

● If the surface does not polish easily, use a“road tar” remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELSWash the wheels regularly, especially during win-ter months in areas where road salt is used. If notremoved, road salt could discolor the wheels.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leathersurfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened inmild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry,soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, readthe manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fab-ric protectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean-ing fluids, solvents, detergents orammonia-based cleaners as they maydamage the leather’s natural finish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-3


FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal air bags” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.WAI0006



MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated:

● in areas of high relative humidity.

● in areas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing.

● where atmospheric pollution exists.

● where road salt is used.Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsand tailgate open to avoid water accumula-tion.

● Check the underbody and inside the pick-upbox. If any sand, dirt or salt is accumulated,wash it off with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5



MEMO

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Temperature conditions for checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22In-cabin Microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longerservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors, engine hood and tailgate Check thatthe doors, engine hood and tailgate operateproperly. Also ensure that all latches lock se-curely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, roll-ers and links as necessary. Make sure that thesecondary latch keeps the hood from openingwhen the primary latch is released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and checkfor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheelalignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism Check that the lock release buttonon the shift selector lever operates properly andsmoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selector lever inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure it has the proper

distance under it when depressed fully. Checkthe brake booster function. Be certain to keep thefloor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operatessmoothly and check that it has the proper freetravel.

Parking brake* Check that the pedal has theproper travel and confirm that your vehicle is heldsecurely on a fairly steep hill with only the parkingbrake applied.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Automatic transmission fluid level* Checkthe level after putting the selector lever in P withthe engine idling at operating temperature.

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure thatthe brake and clutch fluid level is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift lever to N (Neu-tral). For automatic transmission mod-els, move the selector lever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by a NISSAN dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



KA24DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(A/T model)3. Air cleaner4. Engine oil filler cap5. Engine oil dipstick6. Brake fluid reservoir7. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir9. Radiator cap10. Engine coolant reservoir11. Battery

WDI0087

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



VG33E engine

1. Fuse/fusible link box2. Power steering fluid reservoir3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(A/T model)4. Brake fluid reservoir5. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)6. Air cleaner7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Engine oil filler cap11. Engine coolant reservoir12. Battery

WDI0269



VG33ER engine

1. Fuse/fusible link box2. Power steering fluid reservoir3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(A/T model)4. Supercharger5. Brake fluid reservoir6. Air cleaner7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Engine oil filler cap11. Engine coolant reservoir12. Battery

WDI0270



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-ant solution. The anti-freeze solution containsrust and corrosion inhibitors; therefore, additionalengine cooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Wait until the engine andradiator cool down. Serious burnscould be caused by high pressure fluidescaping from the radiator. See precau-tions in “If your vehicle overheats”found in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Anti-freezecoolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAnti-freeze Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0271

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks. This is the normal operatingoil level range. If the oil level is below the L(Low) mark, remove the oil filler cap and pourrecommended oil through the opening. Donot overfill.

KA24DE engineWDI0272

VG33E/VG33ER engineWDI0273

ENGINE OIL



6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it coun-terclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.






5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.




CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Remove the splash shield.

● Remove the six push pins.

● Remove the six bolts and the splashshield.

4. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.Then remove the oil filter by turning it byhand.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surfacewith a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the mounting surface of theengine.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

11. Install the splash shield.





WARNING

● When the engine is running, keephands, jewelry and clothing away fromany moving parts such as the coolingfan and drive belts.

● Automatic transmission fluid is poison-ous and should be stored carefully inmarked containers out of the reach ofchildren.

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FORCHECKING

● The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range on the dipstick after the followingconditions have been met:

– The engine should be warmed up to op-erating temperature.

– The vehicle should be driven at least 5minutes.

– The automatic transmission fluid shouldbe warmed to 122 - 176°F (50 - 80°C).

● The fluid can be checked at fluid tempera-tures of 86 - 122°F (30 - 50°C) using theCOLD range on the dipstick after the engineis warmed up and before driving. However,the fluid should be re-checked using theHOT range.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and setthe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and then move the shiftselector lever through each gear range, end-ing in P (Park).

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID



4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean withlint-free paper.

5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipstick tubeas far as it will go.

6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. Ifthe automatic transmission fluid level iswithin the normal operating range sB , noadditional fluid is required. If the fluid level islow sA add fluid through the dipstick tube.

CAUTION

DO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY GenuineNissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. andAlaska) or Canada NISSAN AutomaticTransmission Fluid. DEXRON™III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also beused. Outside the continental UnitedStates and Alaska contact a NISSAN deal-ership for more information regardingsuitable fluids, including recommendedbrand(s) of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ au-tomatic transmission fluid.

NOTE:

If the vehicle has been driven for a longtime at high speeds, or in city traffic in hotweather, or if it is being used to pull atrailer, the fluid level cannot be read accu-rately. You should wait until the fluid hascooled down (about 30 minutes) beforechecking fluid level.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add GenuineNISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fillthrough the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

WDI0281 WDI0282

POWER STEERING FLUID



For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the brake and clutch sys-tems. The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUIDCheck the clutch fluid level in the reservoir(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level isbelow the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN SuperHeavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluidup to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-quently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WDI0283 WDI0284

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID



WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the light comeson (if so equipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Anycorrosion should be washed off with a solu-tion of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

WDI0303

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY



● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

WDI0224

LDI0302



Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1 Crankshaft2 Water pump3 Generator4 Air conditioner compressor5 Power steering fluid pump

: Tension checking points

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If thebelt is in poor condition or is loose, have itreplaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.


DRIVE BELTS



1 Crankshaft2 Water pump3 Generator4 Air conditioner compressor5 Power steering fluid pump


1 Crankshaft2 Water pump3 Generator4 Air conditioner compressor5 Power steering pump6 Supercharger7 Idler


REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tippedspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance schedule, but do not reusethe spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

VG33E engineWDI0287

VG33ER engineWDI0288 WDI0005

SPARK PLUGS



WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

Except supercharger1. Disconnect the spark plug cables.

When disconnecting, always hold theboots — not the cables. Mark all cablesto identify their original location.

2. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plugsocket.

The plug socket has a rubber seal that holdsthe spark plug so it does not fall when it ispulled out. Make sure each spark plug issnugly fitted into the spark plug socket.

3. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into thespark plug socket and install them. Useonly the specified spark plugs. Turneach plug several full turns by hand, thentighten with the spark plug socket to thecorrect torque. Do not overtighten.

KA24DE engine

WDI0193




Spark plug tightening torque:

14 - 22 ft-lb (20 - 29 N·m)

4. Reconnect the spark plug cables to theiroriginal positions.

With SuperchargerIf replacement is required, please see yourNISSAN dealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenanceintervals shown in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter,wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housingand the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

WDI0290 WDI0291

AIR CLEANER



● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if soequipped)The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To change the filter, perform the following proce-dure: 1. Pivot pins

2. Glove box1. Remove the two pivot pins from the glove

box. Remove the glove box.

CAUTION

Do not disturb the front of the air bagmodule.

1. Reinforcement panel2. Cooling unit3. Screws4. Clip

2. Remove the 7 screws and 1 clip from theglove box frame. Remove the glove boxframe.

WDI0315 WDI0316



1. Cooling unit2. Clip

3. Remove the clip securing the filters in theintake unit.

1. Cooling unit2. Filter

4. Remove the filters.

NOTE:

The filters must be aligned with the plastichook at the bottom.

5. Insert the first filter in the bottom position.Slide it up to the top position and insert thesecond filter in the bottom position.

6. Secure the filter with the clip.

7. Install the glove box frame.

8. Install the glove box.

1. Glove box2. Label (small)3. Label (large)

9. Fill out the date information on the smalllabel. Attach the small and large labels to theglove box lid.

WDI0317 WDI0318 WDI0319



CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0308

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle s1 . This maycause clogging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin s2 .

CHECKING PARKING BRAKEFrom the released position, firmly push the park-ing brake down. If the number of clicks is out ofthe range listed, see a NISSAN dealer.

● 6–7 clicks under depressing force of 44 lb(196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance Abetween the upper surface of the pedal and themetal floor. If it is out of the range shown, see aNISSAN dealer.

Distance A: Under depressing force of 110lb (490 N)

AutomaticTransmission

ManualTransmission

4 1/4 in (110 mm) 4 in (100 mm)

WDI0424

WDI0293 WDI0197

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL



Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every timethe brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-typebrakes on two-wheel drive vehicles self-adjustevery time the parking brake is applied. The reardrum-type brakes on four-wheel drive vehiclesself-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.If the brake pedal goes down farther than normal,it may be due to lack of adjustment of the reardrum brakes. Apply the parking brake severaltimes.

WARNING

If the brake pedal height does not returnto normal, see a NISSAN dealer and haveit checked.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

The rear drum brakes (if so equipped) do nothave audible wear indicators. Should you everhear an unusually loud noise from the rear drumbrakes, have them inspected as soon as possibleby a NISSAN dealer.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release thebrake pedal several times. When brakepedal movement (distance of travel) remainsthe same from one pedal application to thenext, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start theengine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keep the pedal depressed for about30 seconds. The pedal height should notchange.

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times. Thepedal travel distance will decrease graduallywith each depression as the vacuum is re-leased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.



1. Fuse box2. Spare fuses3. Fuse puller

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove sA .

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller sB .

WDI0304

FUSES



4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a knowngood fuse.

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin.

s2 Remove the battery.

s3 Install a new battery with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: Toshiba CR2025 orequivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

WDI0200

WPD0160

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT



5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the manufacturer for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Abulb can be replaced from inside the enginecompartment without removing the headlight as-sembly.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Wattage 65/55Bulb No. HB5/9007*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LIGHTS



Removing the headlight bulb

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector from therear end of the bulb.

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-wise until it is free form the headlight reflec-tor and then remove it sA .

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do notshake or rotate the bulb when removing itsB .

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

● Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into the bulbplastic base until it snaps and stops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.Adjusting the headlight aimIf the headlights need aiming adjustment, pleasesee a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

WDI0305



2. Disconnect bulb connector.

3. Rotate the bulb cover counterclockwise andremove.

4. Remove by pulling it straight out of the foglight assembly. Do not shake or rotate thebulb when removing it. Do not touch theglass envelope.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Front combination light

Headlight 65/55 9007 (HB5)

Turn signal light 28.5 3456k

Parking light side front 5 168

Side marker 5 168

Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 3157NAK

Stop/Tail 27/7 3157k

Back-up 27 3156k

License plate light 3.8 194

Fog light 37.5 899

Dome light type A 8 83

Dome light type B 8 —

Cargo light 10 —

Map light 5 168

High-mounted stop lightSee a NISSAN dealer for

assistance.

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

WDI0307



Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/orcover.

: Indicates bulb removal

: Indicates bulb installation

WDI0306

Map lightWDI0296

Dome and cargo lightWDI0297



See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.Map/compass light

WDI0298

Cargo light - Crew CabWDI0299

Rear combination lightWDI0300



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare)often and always prior to long distance trips. Therecommended tire pressure specifications areshown on the Tire and Loading Information label(this label is also known as the tire placard) underthe 9Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure9heading. The Tire and Loading Information labelis affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularly because:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly when driven overpotholes or other objects or if the vehiclestrikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when thetires are cold. The tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) atmoderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under in-flation, may adversely affect tire life andvehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-denly and cause an accident.

● The vehicle weight capacity is indicatedon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. Do not load your vehicle beyondthis capacity. Overloading your vehiclemay result in reduced tire life, unsafeoperating conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable handlingcharacteristics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading beyond thespecified capacity may also result infailure of other vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, or wheneveryou heavily load your vehicle, use a tirepressure gauge to ensure that the tirepressures are at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH(137 km/h) unless it is equipped with highspeed rated tires. Driving faster than 85MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire failure,loss of control and possible injury.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

License plate lightWDI0301

WHEELS AND TIRES



Tire and loading information label (forUS)

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum number ofoccupants that should be seated in the ve-hicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading information inthe Technical and consumer informationsection.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tires origi-nally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

s4 Recommended cold tire inflation pressure:Inflate the tires to this pressure when thetires are cold. Tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recommendedcold tire inflation is set by the manufacturerto provide the best tire wear and vehiclehandling characteristics based on the ve-hicles GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later in thissection.

s6 and s7 Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped).

Type aLDI0392



Tire and loading information label (forUS)

s1 Original tire size: The size of the tires origi-nally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

s2 Recommended cold tire inflation pressure:Inflate the tires to this pressure when thetires are cold. Tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recommendedcold tire inflation is set by the manufacturerto provide the best tire wear and vehiclehandling characteristics based on the ve-hicles GVWR.

s3 Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (ifso equipped).

Type bLDI0421



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto thevalve stem. Do not press too hard or forcethe valve stem sideways, or air will escape. Ifthe hissing of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure, reposi-tion the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stemand compare to the specification shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much airis added, press the core of the valve stembriefly with the tip of the gauge stem torelease pressure. Recheck the pressure andadd or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, includ-ing the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

FrontOriginal Tire

P255/65R16P265/70R15P265/70R16P265/65R17

240 kPa, 35 PSI

P265/55R17P225/70R15

210 kPa, 30 PSI

RearOriginal Tire

P255/65R16P265/70R15P265/70R16P265/65R17

240 kPa, 35 PSI

P265/55R17P225/70R15

210 kPa, 30 PSI

Spare Tire T135/90 R orD16

420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELINGFederal law requires tire manufacturers to placestandardized information on the sidewall of alltires. This information identifies and describesthe fundamental characteristics of the tire andalso provides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TIN can beused to identify the tire in case of a recall.

LDI0393 WDI0394



s1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is designed forpassenger vehicles.

2. Three-digit number: This number gives thewidth in millimeters of the tire from sidewalledge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number: This number, known asthe aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio ofheight to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number: This number is the wheelor rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number: This number isthe tire’s load index. It is a measurement ofhow much weight each tire can support. Youmay not find this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. Tire speed rating. You should not drive thevehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

WDI0395



s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire(example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Department OfTransportation.9 The symbol can be placedabove, below or to the left or right of TireIdentification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifica-tion mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and yearthe tire was built. For example, the numbers3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If thesenumbers are missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coatedfabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also mustindicate the materials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pres-sure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceedthe maximum permissible inflation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilo-grams and pounds that can be carried by the tire.When replacing the tires on the vehicle, alwaysuse a tire that has the same load rating as thefactory installed tire.

s6 Term of ”tubeless” or ”tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube(“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

s7 The word ”radial”

The word 9radial9 is shown if the tire has radialstructure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are definedthroughout this section, Intended OutboardSidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a white-wall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same molding on the othersidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facingsidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

WDI0396



TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.


All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class 9S9 chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain tensionerswhen recommended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.



Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clearpaved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”section in this manual for tire replacing proce-dures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecifications at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check and ad-just the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire in the tirerotation.


WDI0258



1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically inspectedfor wear, cracking, bulging or objectscaught in the tread. If excessive wear,cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found,the tire(s) should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-in treadwear indicators. When the wear indica-tors are visible, the tire(s) should bereplaced.

● Improper service of the spare tire mayresult in serious personal injury. If it isnecessary to repair the spare tire, con-tact a NISSAN dealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

WDI0259



● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the low tire pressure warn-ing system will not function. Contactyour NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/or sys-tem resetting (for models with the lowtire pressure warning system).

● Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.


Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and may dam-age the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tires be replaced with tires of thesame size, brand, construction and tread pattern.The tire pressure and wheel alignment shouldalso be checked and corrected as necessary.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a TEMPO-RARY SPARE USE ONLY spare tire.



Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on thefront wheels and the original tire usedon the rear wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the two rear originaltires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● With the spare tire installed thetransfer control lever must be in the 2Hposition to prevent the transfer caseand differential gears from beingdamaged.

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.




MEMO

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13

Determining vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14

Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Crew Cab Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15King Cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Towing load/specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-25

Dynamometer testing for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)US measure Imp measure Liter Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

FuelKA24DE (4 cylinder) 15–7/8 gal 13–1/4 gal 60.2 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1VG33E (6 cylinder) 19–3/8 gal 16–1/8 gal 73.5VG33ER (6 cylinder with supercharger) 19–3/8 gal 16–1/8 gal 73.5 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1

Engine oilDrain and Refill

KA24DE With oil filter 3–3/4 qt 3–1/8 qt 3.5 • API Certification Mark *2• API grade SG/SH, Energy conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *2• ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

Without oil filter 3–1/2 qt 2–7/8 qt 3.3VG33E/VG33ER With oil filter 3–1/2 qt 2–7/8 qt 3.3

Without oil filter 3–1/8 qt 2–5/8 qt 3.0Cooling system (with heater and reservoir tank)

KA24DE M/T 4X2 7–3/4 qt 6–3/8 qt 7.3 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent50% Demineralized or distilled waterVG33E/VG33ER A/T & M/T 11–5/8 qt 9–5/8 qt 10.95

Manual transmission gear oilKA24DE 4X2 4–1/4 pt 3–1/2 pt 2.0

Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ Multi 75W-85 or equivalentVG33E/VG33ER 4X2 5–7/8 pt 4–7/8 pt 2.84X4 10–3/4 pt 9 pt 5.1

Final drive gear oilKA24DE 4X2 M/T 2–3/4 pt 2–1/4 pt 1.3

API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*1 or 80W-90 LS*1for Limited Slip Differential (LSD) applications*2VG33E/VG33ER 4X4 Front 3–3/4 pt 3–1/8 pt 1.75Rear 5–7/8 pt 4–7/8 pt 2.8

Transfer fluid 2–3/8 qt 2 qt 2.2 API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90 or Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. andAlaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*3

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmis-sion Fluid.*3

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*6Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*4 or equivalent Dot 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Complex)Air conditioning system refrigerant lb (kg) 1.32 – 1.54 (0.60 – 0.70) HFC-134a (R-134a)*5Air conditioning system lubricant 6.8 oz 7.0 oz 200 ml NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent*5Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent

*1: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).*2: Contact your NISSAN dealer for a list of approved oils.*3: DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also be used. Outside the Continental United States and Alaska contact an authorized NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s)of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ Automatic Transmission Fluid.*4: Available in mainland USA through your authorized NISSAN dealer.*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”*6: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

For 2.4L/3.3L engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

For 3.3L supercharger

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI number (Research oc-tane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,unleaded regular gasoline with an octane ratingof at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)can be used, but only under the following precau-tions:

● have the fuel tank filled only partially withunleaded regular gasoline, and fill up withunleaded premium as soon as possible.

● avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-eration

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-line is recommended.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol system, and may also affect the war-ranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, because this will dam-age the three-way catalyst.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter specificationswhere it is available. Many of the automobilemanufacturers developed this specification toimprove emission system and vehicle perfor-mance. Ask your service station manager if thegasoline meets the World-wide Fuel Charterspecifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents and

Technical and consumer information 9-3


corrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose engine oil with the cor-rect quality and viscosity to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. NISSAN recom-mends the use of a low friction oil (energy con-serving oil) in order to improve fuel economy andconserve energy. Oils which do not have thespecified quality label should not be used as theycould cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the American Petro-leum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION MARK on

the front of the container should be used. Thistype of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, orSJ and Energy Conserving I & II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the API CERTI-FICATION MARK, use API grade SG/SH, EnergyConserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, EnergyConserving oil. An oil with a single designationSG or SH, or in combination with other catego-ries (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may alsobe used if one with the API CERTIFICATIONMARK cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-I,GF-II & GF-III oil can also be used.

NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. Theseoils must, however, meet the API quality and SAEviscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

Oil additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec-ommended SAE viscosity number” shows therecommended oil viscosities for the expectedambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosityother than that recommended could cause seri-ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

WTI0033



Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

● SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for alltemperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if theambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exactequivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubri-cant will cause severe damage to the airconditioning system and will require thereplacement of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.

ATI1028



ENGINE

Model KA24DE VG33E/VG33ER

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Gasoline, 4-cycleCylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.504 x 3.780 (89. x 96.0) 3.602 x 3.268 (91.5 x 83.0)Displacement cu in (cm3) 145.78 (2,389) 199.84 (3,275)Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed rpm

See the “Emission Control label” on the underside of the hood.Ignition timing degree (B.T.D.C.) at idle speed degree/rpmCO percentage at idle speed [No air] %

Except Supercharger SuperchargerSpark plug PFR5G-11 (Standard)*1 PFR5G-11 (Standard)*1 PFR6G-11 (Standard)*1

PFR6G-11 (Cold)*1 PFR6G-11 (Cold)*1 PFR7G-11 (Cold)*1PFR4G-11 (Hot) *1 PFR5G-11 (Hot) *1

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing belt*2Generator belt size

Width x Length in (mm) 0.413 x 35.63 (10.5 x 905) 0.701 x 31.69 (17.8 x 805)

*1: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.*2: Periodic maintenance is necessary. See “Periodic maintenace schedules” in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenace Guide.”

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel/offset in (mm) Tire Spare tire size

4X2 King Cab: XE 15X6JJ/1.18 (30) Steel15X7JJ/0.79 (20) Alloy15X7JJ/1.18 (30) Steel*15X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy*

P225/70R15P225/70R15P265/70R15*P265/70R15*

T135/90D16T135/90D16P265/70R15*P265/70R15*

SE 16X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy P255/65R16 P255/65R16

SC 17X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy P265/55R17 P265/55R17

Crew Cab: XE 15X7JJ/1.18 (30) Alloy15X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy

P265/70R15P265/70R15

P265/70R15P265/70R15

SE 16X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy P255/65R16 P255/65R16

SC 17X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy P265/55R17 P265/55R17

4X4 King Cab: XE 15X7JJ/1.18 (30) Steel15X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy

P265/70R15P265/70R15

P265/70R15P265/70R15

SE 16X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy P265/70R16 P265/70R16

SC 16X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy17X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy

P265/70R16P265/65R17

P265/70R16P265/65R17

Crew Cab: XE 15X7JJ/1.18 (30) Alloy15X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy

P265/70R15P265/70R15

P265/70R15P265/70R15

SE 16X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy P265/70R16 P265/70R16

SC 16X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy17X7JJ/1.57 (40) Alloy

P265/70R16P265/65R17

P265/70R16P265/65R17

*Not available with KA24DE engine.



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Unit: mm (in)Drive Type 2WD 4WD

Body King Cab Crew Cab Crew Cab King Cab Crew Cab Crew Cab

Wheelbase Long Short Long Long Short Long

Overall length*1 5153 (202.9) 5077 (199.9) 5532 (217.8) 5153 (202.9) 5077 (199.9) 5532 (217.8)

Overall width 1725 (67.7)*21808 (71.2)*3,*4

1808 (71.2) 1808 (71.2) 1808 (71.2) 1808 (71.2) 1808 (71.2)

Overall height 1605 (63.2)*21694 (66.7)*3

1694 (66.7)*31775 (69.9)*4

1694 (66.7)*31775 (69.9)*4

1694 (66.7) 1704 (67.1)*31823 (71.8)*41836 (72.3)*5

1704 (67.1)*31823 (71.8)*41836 (72.3)*5

Front tread 1395 (54.9)*21525 (60)*3

1525 (60) 1525 (60) 1525 (60) 1525 (60) 1525 (60)

Rear tread 1390 (54.7)*21507 (59.3)*3,*4

1507 (59.3) 1507 (59.3) 1507 (59.3) 1507 (59.3) 1507 (59.3)

Wheelbase 2950 (116.1) 2950 (116.1) 3329.9 (131.1) 2950 (116.1) 2950 (116.1) 3329.9 (131.1)

Gross vehicle weight rating See the “F.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the driver side door jamb pillar.lb (kg)

Gross axle weight ratingFront lb (kg)Rear lb (kg)

*1: Includes rear step bumper.*2: XE with KA24DE engine.*3: XE with VG33E engine.*4: SC models.*5: SE models.



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

WTI0054 WTI0065

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M-.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown.This label contains valuable vehicle information,such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month andyear of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Num-ber (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

KA24DE engineWTI0056

VG33E/VG33ER engineWTI0057 WTI0058



EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached as shown.

TIRE PLACARDThe cold tire pressure is shown on the tire plac-ard. The tire placard is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed asshown.

WTI0059 WTI0060 WTI0061



Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

1. Remove the two screw gromments from theglove box.

2. Carefully drill a hole using a 0.39 inch (10mm) drill bit at each location mark (smalldimple) on the bumper fascia sA .

3. Insert one grommet into each hole sB .

4. Insert a small screwdriver into the grommetto turn the plastic insert.

5. Install the license plate with two M5 x 25 mmbolts sC .

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMSIt is important to familiarize yourself with the fol-lowing terms before loading your vehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle)- vehicle weight including: standard and op-tional equipment, fluids, emergency tools,and spare tire assembly. This weight doesnot include passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weightplus the combined weight of passengersand cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -maximum total weight (load) limit specifiedfor the vehicle.

WTI0066

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-mum weight (load) limit specified for thefront or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOADCAPACITYThe load capacity of this vehicle is determined byweight, not by available cargo space. For ex-ample, a roof rack, bike carrier, or similar equip-ment does not increase load carrying capacity ofyour vehicle.

To determine vehicle load capacity:

Vehicle weight can be determined by using acommercial-grade scale, found at places such asa truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or ascrap metal recycling facility.

1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle.

2. Compare the curb weight amount to theGVWR specified for your vehicle to deter-mine how much more weight your vehiclecan carry.

3. After loading (cargo and passengers), re-weigh your vehicle to determine if eitherGVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, removecargo as necessary. If either the front or rearGAWR is exceeded, shift the load or removecargo as necessary.

SECURING THE LOAD

For your convenience, tie down hooks are placedat each corner of the truck box. These may beused to help secure cargo loaded into the truckbox.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. Cer-tification Label.

● Do not load the front and rear axle to theGAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

● Loads should be spread out, and cargoshould be properly secured. Large or heavyobjects should be placed toward the front ofthe truck box to help prevent shifting.

WTI0067



WARNING

Overloading not only can shorten the lifeof your vehicle and the tire, but can alsocause unsafe vehicle handling and longerbraking distances. This may cause a pre-mature tire failure which could result in aserious accident and personal injury. Fail-ures caused by overloading are not cov-ered by the vehicle’s warranty.

CREW CAB MODELSCrew Cab models should not be used tocarry a slide-in camper.

KING CAB MODELSThis information is provided for you to properlyinstall a slide-in camper and is based on theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationregulations. It is recommended that, before in-stalling the camper, you carefully read the follow-ing information and ensure that the campermeets the specifications.

This information may not apply to some Canadamodel vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLESSome vehicles are equipped with commercial orcamper bodies. However, this Owner’s Manualdoes not cover these options. For further infor-mation, please refer to the body manufacturer’sinstruction manual.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OFGRAVITYThe illustration indicates the recommendedcargo center of gravity location zone.

King Cab:

L1 = 960.1 mm (37.8 in), L2 = 1,087.1 mm (42.8 in)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. If aload is too far back, it can affect handlingcharacteristics. If a load is too far forward,the front axle may be overloaded.

ATI0703

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADINGINFORMATION



When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper,the total cargo load of the truck consists of thecamper manufacturer’s weight figure, plus:

● the weight of installed additional camperequipment not included in the campermanufacturer’s weight figure,

● the weight of camper cargo,

● and the weight of occupants in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed thetruck’s pay load weight rating and the camper’scenter of gravity should fall within the truck’srecommended center of gravity location zonewhen installed.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading can ad-versely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance and may lead toaccidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITYThe vehicle load weight capacity shown on fol-lowing charts indicate the maximum total weightof passengers, optional equipment (air condition-ing, trailer hitch, etc) and cargo that your vehicleis designed to carry.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that youdo not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for your vehicle. See ’’Vehicle LoadingInformation’’ earlier in this section for details.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures.See the tire placard.

ATI0705



Vehicle Load Weight Capacity (KA24DE Engine)

2WD

King Cab

Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission

XE XE

lbs kg lbs kg

Federal 1312 595 1312 595

California 1312 595 1312 595

Canada 1312 595 1312 595

Vehicle Load Weight Capacity (VG33E Engine)

2WD 4WD

K/C C/C S/B C/C L/B K/C C/C S/B C/C L/B

lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg

Federal 1191 540 1036 470 1103 500 1147 520 970 440 1080 490

California 1191 540 1036 470 1103 500 1147 520 970 440 1080 490

Canada 1191 540 N/A N/A 1103 500 1147 520 N/A N/A 1080 490

Vehicle Load Weight Capacity (VG33ER Engine)

2WD 4WD

K/C C/C S/B C/C L/B K/C C/C S/B C/C L/B

lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg

Federal 1169 530 1014 460 1080 490 1080 490 915 415 1025 465

California 1169 530 1014 460 1080 490 1080 490 915 415 1025 465

Canada N/A N/A N/A N/A 1080 490 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1025 465



MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTSSecure loose items to prevent weight shifts thatcould affect the balance of your vehicle. Whenthe vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weighthe front and the rear wheels separately to deter-mine axle loads. Individual axle loads should notexceed either of the gross axle weight ratings(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).These ratings are given on the vehicle certifica-tion label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move orremove items to bring all weights below the rat-ings.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) isavailable from a NISSAN dealer. This guide in-cludes information on trailer towing ability and thespecial equipment required for proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the following TowingLoad/Specification Chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake sys-tem MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) should not exceed the value specified inthe following Towing Load/ Specification Chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater

than these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced on very steep grades or in low tractionsituations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures are not covered byNISSAN warranties. A NISSAN TrailerTowing Guide (U.S. only) containing infor-mation on trailer towing ability and thespecial equipment required may be ob-tained from a NISSAN dealer.

TOWING A TRAILER



Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 9 - 11 percent ofthe total trailer load within the maximum tongueload limits shown in the following TowingLoad/Specification Chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicleweight/maximum gross axle weightThe gross vehicle weight of the towing vehiclemust not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certificationlabel. The gross vehicle weight equals the com-bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passen-gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and anyother optional equipment. In addition, front or reargross axle weight must not exceed the gross axleweight rating (GAWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S.certification label.

CA0009 CA0036



TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATIONCHART

Unit: lbs (kg)

Model 2WD 4WD

Weight M/T (4 cyl) A/T (4 cyl) M/T (V6) A/T (V6) M/T (V6) A/T (V6)

Maxiumum TrailerWeight*1

3,001 (1,361) 2,000 (907)

Except Supercharger3,500 (1,588)

Except Supercharger5,000 (2,268)

Except S/C C/C L/B3,500 (1,588)

Except S/C C/C L/B5,000 (2,268)

Supercharger3,400 (1,542)

Supercharger4,902 (2,223)

S/C C/C L/B3,400 (1,542)

S/C C/C L/B4,902 (2,223)

Maximum Tongue Load 300 (136) 200 (91)

Except Supercharger350 (159)

Except Supercharger500 (227)

350 (159)Except S/C C/C L/B

500 (227)

Supercharger340 (154)

Supercharger490 (222)

S/C C/C L/B340 (154)

S/C C/C L/B490 (222)

Gross CombinedWeight Rating

7,000 (3,175) 6,000 (2,721) 8,002 (3,629) 9,500 (4,309) 8,002 (3,629) 9,500 (4,309)

RecommendedEquipment*2

Sway Control Device — Sway Control Device Sway Control Device Sway Control Device Sway Control Device

*1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lb (1,361 kg).

*2: A sway control device is recommended for all towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Sway control devices are not offered by NISSAN. See a professional trailer/hitch outlet for a prop-erly designed sway control device for your trailer.

M/T = Manual Transmission C/C = Crew Cab

A/T = Automatic Transmission L/B = Long Bed

2WD = 2-wheel drive S/C = Supercharger

4WD = 4-wheel drive



TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitch

Check the towing capacity of your bumper hitchor receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose aproper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuineNissan trailer hitch is available from your NISSANdealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securelyattached to the vehicle to help avoid personalinjury or property damage due to sway caused bycrosswinds, rough road surfaces or passingtrucks.

CAUTION

● Special hitches which include frame re-inforcements are required for towingabove 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-ine NISSAN hitches for pickup trucksand sport utility vehicles are availableat a NISSAN dealer.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tiresto the recommended cold tire pressure indi-cated on the tire placard.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating andproper inflation pressure should be in accor-dance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’sspecifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.



WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed. Some states or provinces have spe-cific speed limits for vehicles that are towingtrailers. Obey the local speed limits.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

● Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope isnot recommended; however, if you must doso, and if your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transmission, first block thewheels and apply the parking brake, andthen move the transmission shift selectorlever into the P (Park) position. If you movethe shift selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion before blocking the wheels and applyingthe parking brake, transmission damagecould occur.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When going up a long grade, downshift thetransmission to a lower gear and reduce

speed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating.

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles that you do tow, donot drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed by



larger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmlygrip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead,and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve-hicle speed. This combination will help sta-bilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not use5th gear (manual transmission) or overdrive(automatic transmission).

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

When towing a trailer, transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission● Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

● On four-wheel drive vehicles, place thetransfer case in the 2H range. Failure to doso will cause the powertrain to bind up.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start andidle the engine with the transmission in Neu-tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engineafter every 500 miles (805 km) of towingmay cause damage to internal transmissionparts.



DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon tire wear rate when tested under controlledconditions on specified government test courses.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-ment course as a tire graded 100. However,relative tire performance depends on actual driv-ing conditions, and may vary significantly due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to your ve-hicle tires is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplan-ing or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, andC. They represent a tire’s resistance to heatbuild-up, and its ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause tire material to degenerate,reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures canlead to sudden tire failure. Grade C correspondsto a performance level which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B rep-resent higher levels of performance on laboratorytest wheels than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. You may also write to: NHTSA,U.S. Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor ve-hicle safety from the Hotline.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”’when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 mph (88 km/h),then quickly release the accelerator pedalcompletely and keep it released for at least 6seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 mph (85 - 97 km/h) for at least 5minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 mph (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least threetimes.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 mph (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off.

9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one moretime.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed. If you cannot or do not wantto perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealercan conduct it for you.

DYNAMOMETER TESTING FORINSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M)TEST (US only)Due to legal requirements in some states/areas,your vehicle may be tested for emissions on adynamometer. The transfer control lever (if soequipped) MUST be in the 2H position for I/Mtesting on a two wheel dynamometer.

WARNING

● If the transfer control lever is not in the2H position during the dynamometerI/M testing, the vehicle could come offthe dynamometer and cause seriouspersonal injury and/or body damage tothe vehicle.

● Serious damage will occur to the 4WDsystem if the transfer control lever isnot in the 2H position.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput-ers that monitor and control a number of systemsto optimize performance and help service techni-cians with diagnosis and repair. Depending onthe equipment on your vehicle, some of the com-puters monitor emission control systems, brakingsystems and air bag systems, just to name a few.Some data about vehicle operation may bestored in the computers for use during servicing.Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs.For example, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance, and seat belt use by the driver or passen-ger may be recorded, depending on vehicleequipment. These types of systems are some-times called Event Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access theelectronic data that may be stored in the vehicle’scomputers (sounds are not recorded). NISSANand NISSAN dealers have equipment to accesssome of this data; others may also have thisequipment. The data may be retrieved duringroutine vehicle servicing or for special research. Itmight also be accessed with the consent of thevehicle owner or lessee, in response to a requestby law enforcement, or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS



A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for the 2004 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts oftenshow premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted laws

that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com.



10 Index

A

Air bagPassenger supplemental air bag ON/OFFswitch and light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . .1-7Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-13Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation. . . . . . . . . . .4-5Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12Air conditioner system refrigerant andlubrication recommendations . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . .4-2Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . .2-16Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . .5-27Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-10Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-14FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-28

Auto-lock free-running hubs . . . . . . . . . .5-22Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-33Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-10Transmission selector lever lockrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Battery replacement(See remote keyless entry system) . . . .3-8, 8-29Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . .5-27Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-32Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-15, 8-27Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-9Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-14Check engine indicator light(See malfunction indicator lamp) . . . . . . .2-14Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-41Child restraints . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-30, 1-39

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . .1-30Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-42

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-18Clutch

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-28Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . .4-2


CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-9Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Defogger switch

Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . .2-19Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Driving

Auto-lock free-running hubs . . . . . . . .5-22Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-10Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-16Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Dual 12 volt power outlets . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-12Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25

EngineBefore starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-13Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-9Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light. . . . . . . . .2-11Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2

F

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-22Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-11Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Fuel filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Fuel filler lid and cap . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

G

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

10-2


H

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-22Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Headlight aiming adjustment . . . . . . . . . .8-31Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-20Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . .4-2Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Hubs

Auto-lock free-running hubs . . . . . . . .5-22

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-11In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audible remind-ers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-21Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39

J

Jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-4

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12Emission control information label . . . . .9-12Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .9-10Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-18

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-13Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-13Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-32Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-9Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Headlight aiming adjustment . . . . . . . .8-31Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-20Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-11

Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-12Passenger supplemental air bag ON/OFFswitch and light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-35Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-4Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Low tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . .5-3Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . .2-30Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). . . . . . . .2-14Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-21

10-3


MirrorInside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Outside mirror control . . . . . . . .3-13, 3-14Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Multi-remote control system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-4

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-13Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light. . . . . . .2-11Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . .3-13, 3-14Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-15, 5-16Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . .6-11Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-27Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

P

ParkingParking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Passenger supplemental air bag ON/OFFswitch and light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Power

Dual 12 volt power outlets . . . . . . . . .2-25Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . .1-30Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-20Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-29FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-28

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . .2-19Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-4Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-25Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-4Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25

SeatJump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Seat beltInfants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-23Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-20Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-26

10-4


Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-24Two-point type without retractor . . . . . .1-27Two-point type without retractor(rear center lap belt) . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Separate seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . .5-11, 5-12Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-26Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-35SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

SteeringPower steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-28Step rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-18, 2-13Supplemental restraint system

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-7Switch

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-33Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-22Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-20Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Overdrive switch . . . . . . .5-14, 5-15, 5-16Passenger supplemental air bag ON/OFFswitch and light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . .2-19Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-18

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Tailgate latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light. . . . . . .2-11

Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-44

Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Tires of 4-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . . .8-44Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-24Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-11

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-41Towing

2-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-134-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-14Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Towing load/specification chart . . . . . .9-20Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-10Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-16Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-14

Travel (See registering your vehicle inanother country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Turn signal switch (See headlight andturn signal switch) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20, 2-22

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-24

10-5


V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-24Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-29Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .9-10Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-13Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-13Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-10Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-11Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light. . . . . . .2-11Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-22Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-11Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-12Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-16Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-18Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-18Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-9Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-33Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-18Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-18Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

10-6


RECOMMENDED FUEL:

For 2.4L/3.3L engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

For 3.3L supercharger

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI number (Research oc-tane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,unleaded regular gasoline with an octane ratingof at least 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)can be used, but only under the following precau-tions:

● have the fuel tank filled only partially withunleaded regular gasoline, and fill up withunleaded premium as soon as possible.

● avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-eration

However, for maximum vehicle perfo-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-line is recommended.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● API Certification Mark

● API grade SG/SH Energy Conserving I & IIor API grade SJ or SL Energy Conserving

● ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

● 5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See tire placard.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Filling information 10-7


1. Engine coolant 8-92. Battery 8-173. Power steering fluid 8-154. Automatic transmission fluid 8-145. Heater and air conditioner 4-2; Audio

system 4-106. Passenger supplemental air bag1-77. Passenger supplemental air bag on/off

switch 1-168. Fuel filler cap 3-11; Fuel recommenda-

tions 9-39. Spare tire 6-210. Seat belts 1-2011. Door locks 3-212. Driver supplemental air bag 1-713. Hood release 3-914. Meters and gauges 2-315. Clutch fluid 8-1616. Brake fluid 8-1617. Engine oil 8-1018. Window washer fluid 8-17

WGS0018

QUICK REFERENCE

10-8 Filling information


Documents

2004 Nissan Frontier Owners Manual